JP2013236826A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of operating until a person in charge of repair of a manufacturer arrives by taking emergency measures against occurrence of trouble.SOLUTION: In a plurality of decorative boards, a control signal is commonly input and output using an input connector and an output connector as an input/output interface portion, and it can be determined each whether game-board-side luminous data SL-DAT are data to itself based on contents (addresses) of address data included in the game-board-side luminous data SL-DAT, namely identification information, thus totally preventing correspondence between various kinds of LEDs allowed to emit light by each of the plurality of decorative boards from being altered even if a clerk of a hall, or the like removes one decorative board that cannot be easily used because of occurrence of trouble, and electrically connects the output connector of a decorative board immediately prior to the one decorative board to the input connector of a decorative board immediately after the one decorative board by spare wiring.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, based on information (control command) from a main control device (game control means), an effect control device (effect control means) is connected to each LED device (light emission means) via a plurality of LED drive circuits (light emission control means). A pachinko machine is proposed as a gaming machine for controlling (see Patent Document 1, for example). The plurality of LED drive circuits in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 are connected in a daisy chain that is electrically connected in a daisy chain and is based on serial data, a clock signal, a latch signal, and the like from an effect control device. Thus, each LED device is caused to emit light based on the received serial data.

JP 2009-34391 A (paragraphs [0030], [0044] to [0047], and FIG. 11)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since a plurality of LED drive circuits are daisy chain connected, one LED drive circuit out of the plurality of LED drive circuits is used due to some reason. If it becomes difficult to do so, serial data captured in the subsequent LED driving circuit following the one LED driving circuit is not transmitted from the one LED driving circuit, so that from one LED driving circuit to the last stage LED driving circuit. For this reason, it is impossible to perform any illumination effect by the corresponding LED device. When a hall clerk removes one LED drive circuit that has become difficult to use due to a problem and rewires it so that it does not produce an illumination effect by the LED device corresponding to the one LED drive circuit Since the plurality of LED drive circuits are connected in a daisy chain, the data length of the serial data becomes a fixed length, so that the correspondence between the LED drive circuit and the LED device is broken, resulting in an unclear meaning. For this reason, if a problem occurs in one LED drive circuit for any reason and it becomes difficult to use it, a hall clerk or the like has to turn off the power to the gaming machine and operate the gaming machine. There was a problem that it was impossible.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to operate until a repair person in charge of the manufacturer arrives at the hall by taking an emergency measure against the occurrence of a failure. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

(Solution 1)
A game control means equipped with a game control microprocessor for proceeding with a game based on a game ball launched by a launching device entering a start area toward a game area defined on the game board, and the game control An effect control means equipped with an effect control microprocessor for transmitting a control signal to a plurality of light emission control means for causing the light emission means to emit light based on a control command transmitted from the means to control the progress of the effect. The plurality of light emission control means are electrically connected by wires in a row from the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means, and in the identification information included in the control signal. Whether or not it is data for itself, and at least a noise removing means for removing noise from the control signal, and an input / output interface Each of the plurality of light emission control means. The input / output interface unit shares the input / output of the control signal from the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means. In the case where it becomes difficult to use due to a problem with one light emission control means, the first light emission control means is changed from the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means except for the one light emission control means. A gaming machine characterized in that the order of the light emission control means can be arbitrarily rearranged so as to be connected in a row.

  This gaming machine includes game control means and effect control means. The game control means is equipped with a game control microprocessor that advances the game based on the fact that the game ball launched by the launching device has entered the start area toward the game area defined on the game board. . The effect control means is equipped with an effect control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the effect by transmitting a control signal to a plurality of light emission control means for causing the light emission means to emit light based on a control command transmitted from the game control means. is there.

  The plurality of light emission control means are electrically connected by wiring in a row from the light emission control means at the first stage to the light emission control means at the last stage, and are data for themselves based on identification information included in the control signal. It is determined whether or not there is at least a noise removing unit and an input / output interface unit. The noise removing means removes noise from the control signal. Input / output of control signals is shared by the input / output interface unit from the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means, and a problem occurs in one of the light emission control means. If it becomes difficult to use the light emission control means, the order of the light emission control means is arbitrary so that the first light emission control means is connected to the last light emission control means except for one light emission control means. Can be rearranged.

  For example, in the case where a failure occurs in one light emission control means from the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means, it is difficult to use one light emission control means. The light emission control means and the light emission control means immediately after the one light emission control means are electrically connected by the spare wiring, so that the length of the spare wiring is the same as that of the previous light emission control means. The length of the wiring electrically connecting the light emission control means and the length of the wiring electrically connecting one light emission control means and the next light emission control means become longer and the spare wiring becomes noise. Even if it becomes easy to be influenced by the noise, the noise can be removed from the control signal by the noise removing means provided in the next light emission controlling means.

  Thus, a plurality of light emission control means are electrically connected in a daisy chain from the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means, and from the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means. When the input / output interface of the control signal is shared by the input / output interface unit, it becomes difficult to use one of the plurality of light emission control means due to a problem with one light emission control means. Except for the control means, the order of the light emission control means can be arbitrarily rearranged so that the light emission control means from the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means can be connected, so that the first light emission From the control means to the light emission control means at the final stage, if there is a problem with one light emission control means for some reason and it becomes difficult to use, a problem occurs. Without using one light emission control means that has become difficult to use, the control signal is sent to the light emission control means one before the one light emission control means and the light emission one light after the one light emission control means. The control means can be electrically connected. At this time, the spare wiring, the wiring for electrically connecting the light emission control means one before the one light emission control means and the one light emission control means, one light emission control means and one light emission control means. Comparing the wiring that electrically connects the subsequent light emission control means with each other, although the length of the spare wiring becomes longer and the spare wiring is more susceptible to noise, multiple light emission control means are Since each of the removal means is provided, noise can be removed from the control signal by the noise removal means provided in the light emission control means subsequent to the one light emission control means. The plurality of light emission control means can determine whether or not the data is for itself based on the identification information included in the control signal. One light emission control means that has become difficult to remove is removed, and the light emission control means immediately before the one light emission control means and the light emission control means immediately after the one light emission control means are electrically connected by a spare wiring. Even if connected, the correspondence relationship of the light emitting means that each of the plurality of light emission control means emits does not collapse at all. By such an emergency measure, the gaming machine can be operated until a repair person from the manufacturer of the gaming machine arrives. Therefore, it is possible to operate until a repair person in charge of the manufacturer arrives by taking an emergency measure against the occurrence of a problem.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the game board 4 in FIG. 95 corresponds to the game board, the game area 1100 in FIG. 95 corresponds to the game area, the hitting ball launcher 650 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the launcher, and FIG. The upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 correspond to the start region, the main control MPU 4100a in FIG. 97 corresponds to the game control microprocessor, the main control board 4100 in FIG. 97 corresponds to the game control means, and FIG. Various commands 121 correspond to control commands, various LEDs electrically connected to subsequent decorative boards in FIG. 120 correspond to light emission means, and the subsequent various decorative boards in FIG. 120 serve as a plurality of light emission control means. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK in FIG. 120 correspond to control signals, and the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 4150 in FIG. 150a corresponds to the effect control microprocessor, the peripheral control board 4140 in FIG. 100 corresponds to the effect control means, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the game machine, and is included in the light emission data SL-DAT on the game board side. The content (address) of the address data corresponds to the identification information, the noise removal circuit NC in FIG. 119 corresponds to the noise removal means, and the input connector DLCN0 and the output connector DLCN2 in FIG. 119 correspond to the input / output interface unit.

(Solution 2)
The gaming machine according to Solution 1, wherein the first light emission control means out of the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means has a problem and is difficult to use. In this case, the auxiliary wiring is electrically connected to the light emission control means immediately preceding the one light emission control means and the light emission control means subsequent to the one light emission control means. The length of the wiring that electrically connects the previous light emission control means and the one light emission control means, and the one light emission control means and the next light emission control means are electrically connected to each other. Even if the spare wiring is easily affected by noise because it is longer than the length of the wiring to be connected, noise is removed from the control signal by the noise removing means provided in the next light emission control means. The length of the spare wiring is Is preset to a length straddle the emission control unit of the gaming machine, characterized in that it is housed at a predetermined position of the rear surface of the game board. In this way, since the length of the spare wiring is set in advance to be able to straddle one light emission control means, a plurality of spare wirings can be accommodated without being bulky at a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board. At the same time, if a clerk of the hall or the like has trouble with one light emission control means for some reason and it becomes difficult to use it, take out the spare wiring from a predetermined place on the back of the game board and It is possible to quickly perform wiring work (first aid) in which the light emission control means immediately before the control means and the light emission control means immediately after the one light emission control means are electrically connected by the spare wiring. .

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be operated until a repair person in charge of the manufacturer arrives at the hall by taking an emergency measure against the occurrence of a problem.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a right view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko game machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen afterwards. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front view of a launching power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko game machine. FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 92 after. FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 92 cut in the vertical direction. It is a detailed front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 95 and was seen from the front. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a launch control input circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. It is a timing chart of the predetermined point in the drive circuit of the firing solenoid of FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a sub liquid crystal drive substrate. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship (characteristic curve) between the operation amount (resistance value) of a brightness adjustment volume, and the brightness | luminance of the backlight of a sub liquid crystal display device, (b) is brightness | luminance adjustment of the backlight of a sub liquid crystal display device. (C) is a schematic diagram showing variation in luminance adjustment, (d) is a range of the rotation angle of the luminance adjustment volume with respect to the luminance variation range of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device at the time of new use and reuse. FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a decoration board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection of each subsequent decoration board | substrate. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. FIG. 123 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 122. FIG. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 125. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payment control part. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control part of FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 129; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal switch operation determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation angle switch log | history production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a spherical collision determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball removal setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere ball movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation | movement monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error cancellation switch operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal process (a) at the time of paying-out operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation process (a) from CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation detection switch log | history creation process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the rotation detection piece of a driven gear and a pair of rotation detection switch accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the rotation detection piece of a driven gear with a counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit, and a pair of rotation detection switch. (A) is a table | surface figure which shows ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switch accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit, (B) is accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of a dial operation part. It is a table | surface figure which shows ON / OFF of a pair of rotation detection switch. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a LOCKN signal log | history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection malfunction determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection confirmation signal with respect to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for sub liquid crystals. It is explanatory drawing (range which approached the maximum value side) which shows the operation | movement of an initial value update type counter. It is explanatory drawing (range which approached the minimum value side) which shows a motion of the counter of an initial value update type. It is a figure which shows an example of production. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the connection malfunction determination process in the case of determining the input of a LOCKN signal directly, (b) is a flowchart which shows an example of the connection recovery process in the case of determining the input of a LOCKN signal directly. . The number of times it is determined that there is an input of the LOCKN signal every time this process is executed within a predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that there is an input of the LOCKN signal based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST It is a flowchart which shows an example of the connection malfunction determination process in the case of determining whether (accumulation frequency) has reached the accumulation frequency upper limit CC-LMT. (A) shows that the LOCKN signal is continuously input every time the connection failure determination process is performed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing when determining whether or not there is, and (b) is a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that a LOCKN signal is input based on LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a connection recovery process in a case where it is determined whether or not a LOCKN signal is continuously input every time the connection failure determination process is executed. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame of embodiment different from the example of FIG. 20 etc. from the left front.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko gaming machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 7 is the outer frame, main body frame, constituting the pachinko gaming machine, It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the game board and the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment includes an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game frame 4 having a box frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and the front of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 are played. And a door frame 5 pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable so as to be closed from the person side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 stores a gaming window 101 formed so that the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a gaming ball disposed below the gaming window 101. And a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. Are substantially the same dimensions, and the vertical width dimension of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is desired to have a gaming area 1100 into which a gaming ball is driven through a substantially circular gaming window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the gaming window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a bar body 1250 is provided that is closed so as to cover the back of the game board 4.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes an upper and lower upper frame plate 10 and a lower frame plate 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. Side frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, It is assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting 13 together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and penetrates up and down substantially at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. An engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction is provided. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The projecting portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 is formed by bending plastic deformation of a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and extends in the left-right direction. A plate-like horizontal piece 17, a plate-like vertical piece 18 that extends from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and is fixed to the side frame plates 12, 13, and the vertical piece 18 extends in the opposite direction. A plate-like engagement piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In the present embodiment, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left and right. In addition to being formed in an asymmetric shape, the vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear portions. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 passes through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 passes through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 is arranged so as to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower support plate 20 and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12. A support bracket 21, a reinforcement bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22 23. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend toward the center of the tip from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b, and the left side frame depending on the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 57) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support 644 (see FIG. 59, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame 13 at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 82) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Further, the outer frame 2 further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing bracket 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protruding piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and is rotated with respect to the support protruding piece 20b by a rivet 28. It is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. The elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 is such that the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support saddle hole 20c and the distal end side of the stopper portion 27a. Is opposed to the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f, and is not in contact). In a certain normal shaft support state, the centers of the shaft support pin 633 and the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a located at the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c formed by bending are inclined. It is in a state of being opposed in the direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and abuts against the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support hole 20c. Clamped between the inner surface of one side To hold. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame shaft support metal 644 (see FIG. 57). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum). Alloy), the pachinko machine 1 must be fixed at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility lined up in the amusement hall. However, since such operations are performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to make nails easier and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be used without problems in existing pachinko island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. A game board 4 having a large lateral dimension when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall 605 (see FIG. 57, etc.) of the body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility in a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device ( For example, it can be attached in close contact with an adjacent ball lending machine or CR unit.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The frame base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the left outer periphery, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower right side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 A pair of side speaker covers 290 disposed on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. There.

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[3-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a gaming frame 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a vertically long and substantially elliptical shape. 110, an upper bracket 120 that is attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 and fixes the upper decorative unit, and on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 on the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101. A pair of side speakers 130 to be attached and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the front view of the door frame base main body 110 are provided.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. Handle relay terminal plate 192 that relays connection between the main control board 4100 and the main control board 4100, and a hand that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192 The relay terminal plate cover 193 and the door frame base disposed on the opposite side of the launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 etc. across the center in the left-right direction (on the right side of the center in the left-right direction (axial support side) in rear view) A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 attached to the rear surface of the main body and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 covering the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are provided.

  The overall rigidity of the door frame base unit 100 is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which a metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. At the same time, the decorative unit 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like are strong enough to be supported.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and the peripheral control provided in the game board 4 described later. An amplifier circuit connected to the substrate 4140 is provided to amplify the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control substrate 4140 and output it to each speaker 130. Although not shown in the drawings, in the present embodiment, the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, the decorative units 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 are provided. The wiring that connects the dial drive motor 414, the switches 432a, 432b, 432c, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. The substrates 194 are gathered and bundled at the right side (axial support side) position in the rear view and extend rearward so as to be connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3. It has become.

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with synthetic resin, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, etc., and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has an inner shape that is vertically long and substantially elliptical. The game window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view) is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be easily formed. It can be done.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, and the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and a game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Portion 114, wiring passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from handle device 500 to pass therethrough, and handle mounting portion Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a 14 cylinder extending short toward the front by the upper is provided with an insertion possible Joana 116.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle relay terminal plate 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base main body 110 in the rear view. The board mounting portion 118 for mounting the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 disposed on the lower right side (the shaft support side) of the game window 101 and the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the game window 101 is closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 A security cover mounting part 119 for projecting rearward from the arrangement for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 on the rear side. A glass unit support step 110a with which the front outer periphery of the unit 590 can abut, and a glass unit locking member 190 that protrudes rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a four engaging member mounting portion 110b for rotatably supporting the.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even if it tries to do so, the intrusion of the tool can be prevented by the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603, and the crime prevention function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the upper bracket 120, the side speaker 130, the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the upper center of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and both left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. The upper bracket 120 is partially inserted into the upper decorative unit 280 so that the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is like that.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to a player seated in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position separated from the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality (three in the present embodiment) of protruding in the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The protrusion 143 includes a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 that is inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the upper surface, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 bent toward the front (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 bent forward toward the front right side (open side) of the upper long edge. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open-side outward bent projecting pieces 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side. Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action can be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape. Can be prevented, and only the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. In addition, the rear side crime prevention end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  Although the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 is not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing. Further, the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view includes an operation piece 190c extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a in a direction different from the locking piece 190b. Yes. As shown in FIG. 18, the operation piece 190c is covered on the rear side by a security cover 180, so that the operation piece 190c cannot be operated with the security cover 180 attached. Thus, it is possible to prevent the glass unit 590 from being easily removed by rotating the glass unit locking member 190.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle relay terminal board cover 193 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 are each fixed to a predetermined position on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[3-2. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 27B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208, a side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side decoration frame 202 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210. And.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A substrate 214 and a right side lower decorative substrate 216 which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially vertical center of the side inner lens 212 on the lower side and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted; A right side upper decorative substrate cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214, and a right side that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216. The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the upper rear portion of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224; an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202; and a side sub-lens 228 attached to a predetermined position on a side surface of the side upper cover 208 from the inside. Yes. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper decoration board 214 on the right side is arranged so that the LED 214c is decorated for light emission.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surface of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are translucent members. The side upper cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. The front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently decorated with light by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control board 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 is entirely formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101, and specifically, an arc shape along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. The inner frame 202a is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 202a toward the outer side, and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. An outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to curve toward the upper end edge of 202a, an upper end frame 202c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, and lower ends of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a The inner frame is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in the present embodiment) along the circumferential direction of the lower end frame 202d that connects the edges and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting the outer frame 202b 02a.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 202b is formed in a straight line at the substantially same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is the upper and lower sides. Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b by a plurality of partition walls 202f. Is a light emitting decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. In addition, the radiating lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition wall frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the slit 202e and the light emitting decoration opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and the rear surface. Are formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 has a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a line.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 204a. A plurality of light guides 206a capable of protruding is provided. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and can be inserted and fitted into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204 so that it appears as if a jewel has been fitted into the opening 204a. It can be done. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 206 may be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. In addition, the tip of the light guide unit 206a can be shined as a gemstone.

  The side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 has an upper surface and a right side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 is provided with a mounting step 208a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, or the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 or the like is formed on the end surface. Also, two cutouts 208b arranged on the upper and lower sides are formed on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, so that the side sub-lens 228 attached to the inside through the cutouts 208b is desired to the front side. It has become. By inserting the side sub-lens 228 into the notch 208b of the side upper cover 208, only this part can emit light in a different manner.

  The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape that is substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. A peripheral lens portion 210 a and a radiating lens portion 210 b inserted into the slit 202 e of the side decorative frame 202 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is set as the accommodation step part 210c made. The accommodation step 210c accommodates an upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like which will be described later. Further, the side lens 210 includes an attachment portion 210 d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208 a in the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is not uniform. Thus, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron can provide a distinctive appearance in which the peripheral lens portion 210a is sparkling.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are formed in the side lens 210 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body part 212a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens part 210b (slit 202e of the side decorative frame 202) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body part 212a and projects forward from the main body part 212a And a plate-like light guide part 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed in a state where the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The light transmitted through the main body part 212a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body part 212a.

  By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be birefringently refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape as well as the irregular refraction can make the appearance of the side lens 210 (circumferential lens portion 210a) sparkle and make the sense of perspective unclear.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 202g of the side decorative frame 202 (the periphery of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 202e (side lens 210 of the side lens 210) is used. The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). Note that the LED 214c on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 that decorates the side sub lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in this embodiment.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position and in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a front view. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the upper end of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in front view. It has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 is radiated from the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the lower player by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and it causes noise to other pachinko gaming machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted due to the uneven thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 226 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. In addition, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[3-3. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. 30A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 30B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from behind after being disassembled.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 includes a side decoration frame 242 that forms a skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame decoration 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250. And.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration board 256. That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 disposed in the upper right part in the front view of the side decoration frame 242, and an upper part that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to the upper rear side of the side decoration frame 242. The speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and a left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The side upper cover 248 is substantially entirely milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control board 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 is entirely formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101, and specifically, an arc shape along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. The inner frame 242a is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a toward the outside, and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion, and the upper portion that continues is the inner frame. An outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of 242a, an upper end frame 242c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, and lower ends of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a An inner frame arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in the present embodiment) along the circumferential direction of the lower end frame 242d that connects the edges and the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 42a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 242b has a rear end at a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 that is formed in a straight line at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. In addition, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. In addition, the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation that extends radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b by a plurality of partition walls 242f. Is a light emitting decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 to be described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition wall frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light emitting decoration opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242 and is also provided on the rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 has a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244 and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to the vicinity of the front end thereof. A plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude is provided. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it can appear as if gems are also fitted in the opening 244a. It can be done. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 may be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide 246a can be shined as a jewel.

  The side upper cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has an upper surface and a left side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100), and a lower surface (lower end). The shape is substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 is provided with a mounting step 248a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 includes a covering portion 248b that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side on the outer side surface (the left side surface in a front view).

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 later. A peripheral lens portion 250a and a radiation lens portion 250b to be inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 242g contacting the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is made the accommodation step part 250c made. The housing step 250c accommodates an upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the side lens 250 includes an attachment portion 250 d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 250 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 248 a in the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to have a distinctive appearance.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are formed in the side lens 250 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body 252a and projects forward from the main body 252a. A plate-shaped light guide portion 252b disposed at the position. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body 252a.

  By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubly refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction makes the appearance of the side lens 250 (circumferential lens portion 250a) sparkle and makes it possible to show a mysterious feeling with an unclear perspective.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (the periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 242e (side lens 250 of the side lens 250) is used. The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a front view. And the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in front view. It has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 is radiated from the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the lower player by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. The surface is formed into a polyhedron shape, and the plate thickness is non-uniform so that the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted.

  The upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[3-4. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a that penetrates largely to the center and both the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 that has a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 A central lens 282 fitted from the rear side, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281, and an outer shape in front view The shape is similar to that of the front decorative member 281 and the center lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 are placed in front. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 281 so as to be sandwiched between the decoration members 281; an upper decoration substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the main body member 285 and mounted with a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b on the front surface; And a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so that the outer shape of the front view is substantially the same as that of the main body and covers the upper decorative board 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent continuously from the lower end of the front decorative member 281, and the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is downward A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from the upper side and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287, It is equipped with. In this embodiment, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually decorated with light emission. In the present embodiment, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

  The front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 has an inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a extending in a circular arc shape in which the central upper end is a side extending left and right, the central lower end is a vertex, and each side is a loose arc in front view. It is formed in a deformed pentagonal shape, and has three projecting portions extending into the central opening 281a from the approximate center and bottom vertex of the upper side on both sides of the upper side. The front decorative member 281 has a plurality of streaks extending obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281a by the streaks. A side opening 281b is formed so as to extend along the streaking as well as the shape of the blade extending.

  The central lens 282 fitted into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward. Are formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing in different directions. The central lens 282 is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that is trillant cut, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel base. .

  The inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and a fine lens (or prism) is formed on the surface. A plurality of light sources are formed so that light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be diffused widely toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been. Note that a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, as in the case of the inner lens 283, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. Can emit light.

  Note that the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of being clouded by a plurality of minute lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side is not clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 has an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening is inclined downward and closed. Center portion 285a inclined obliquely upward, and a closed rear end disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a is positioned substantially at the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286, penetrating the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b. ing. When the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side so that light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  The lower decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The shape of the end portion of the upper speaker frame 266 near the upper end frame 202c, 242c is substantially the same as the end shape of the upper speaker cover 226, 266 closer to the upper end frame 202c, 242c. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It emits light.

[3-5. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like. It is arranged between. The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 that has an annular opening that is formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the dish unit 300 that is disposed below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328.

  In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a translucent member having a milky white color similar to that of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later. The side speaker cover 290 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-6. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the dish unit 300 includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a front center of the dish unit base 310. The upper and rear sides of the upper plate body 312 that is fixed to the upper plate and the upper and rear sides are opened and the left side of the front view (shaft support side) bulges forward is covered. Upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the direction projects forward, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction Left and right ones having a plurality of light guide portions 318a that are arranged between the decorative member 316, the upper plate front decorative member 316, and the upper plate upper panel 314 and are fitted into the openings 316a of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The upper dish upper lens 318 and the upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged on the opposite side across the upper dish upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314, and a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a are mounted on the upper surface. Light from the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 disposed between the upper plate upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322, and the upper plate upper lens 318 and the upper plate upper panel 314. And an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing to the upper dish upper lens 318 side.

  The dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324, and covers the outer periphery of the opening 328a A cover 328, a dish side middle cover 330 having openings 330 a that are disposed on both left and right sides of the lower dish cover 328 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and an opening 330 a of the dish side middle cover 330 A dish-side middle cover lens 332 fitted from the side, and a dish-side outer cover 334 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 and extending in the left-right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. Note that the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front is formed with a lock hole 330b at a right end portion thereof to face a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the right dish side outer cover 334 when viewed from the front.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side when viewed from the front of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a CR unit (not shown).

  The dish unit 300 constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. The dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) of the ball lending unit mounting part 310b, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 40, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h extending in a tubular shape rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are Since the upper bowl ball supply port 310c cannot linearly enter the upper bowl 301 in the front, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball with the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c closed and its roll is changed. The moving direction is changed, and is guided so as to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. It becomes. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged part 310k that spreads leftward when viewed from the front, and the lower dish ball supply is provided by this enlarged part 310k. The front end of the mouth 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be positioned in the vicinity of the intermediate position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 at the front end, and a decoration attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting an operation unit 400, which will be described later, formed in a step shape lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the plate body 312.

  Although not described in detail, the decoration mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 has upper and lower positions at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 attached to the lower surface. An opening or a notch penetrating in the direction is formed, and an opening or the like through which a wiring cable connecting the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control board 4140 can be passed is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. .

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 has a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314, and the light guide part of the upper dish upper lens 318 from the lower side to the plurality of openings 316a. The upper plate upper lens 318 can be sandwiched between the upper plate upper panel 314 and the upper plate upper panel 314 by attaching it to the decorative mounting portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on its surface is disposed below the upper dish upper lens 318, and an upper dish right decorative board 320 and an upper dish left decorative board 322 are disposed. Is sufficiently diffused so that the entire upper dish upper lens 318 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted into the opening 316a is the same. It is shaped, and by fitting this light guide portion 318a, it appears to have an appearance that a pair-shaped gemstone is fitted into the opening 316a of the upper dish front decorative member 316. .

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed in an inverted triangle shape with the outer shape in front view bulging downward and arcs on each side, and includes an opening 328a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is made of translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along a lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from a substantially center in the left and right direction to a side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 includes an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, the right (open side) dish side middle cover 330 in the front view has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

  The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330 c extending rearward from the lower front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330 c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is like that. In addition, a part of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The dish-side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 when viewed from the front. It is formed in a box shape. In the present embodiment, a handle insertion hole 334 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a part of the dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side excluding the central portion of the lower plate body 324 is covered with the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. And an operation piece 342 supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310 and moved upward and downward by the up-and-down movement of the operation piece 342, and a ball feeding unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 is provided with a contact piece 343a that comes into contact with the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is slidable in the vertical direction. An upper dish ball removal base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 39), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (see FIGS. 38 and 38). 40) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feeding unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower tray ball supply rod 310h in the tray unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 via the opening 344a and the ball guide channel 344b of the upper plate ball removal base 344. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet channel 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g through the lower dish ball supply port 310h through the lower dish ball supply rod 310h. Can be discharged.

  The ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball removal base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330c of the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 in front view and left and right. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and rotating the opening / closing shutter 352 while lowering the lower dish A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and a closing portion 352a is biased by a coil spring between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a.

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower dish ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. Can be done.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right dish side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the horizontal direction of the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300. The surface shape is such that the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330 is smoothly continuous.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 and the like. Yes, the lower plate ball hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward and are opened and closed by sliding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 backward. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the holding of the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the lower dish The ball slide slider 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, and the closing portion 352a is lowered by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. As the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides forward, the lower part ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball rental button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball rental switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining frequency indicator 365c can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display portion 363. The ball lending switch 365a, the return switch 365b, and the remaining frequency indicator 365c are mounted on the frequency display plate 365, and the frequency display plate 365 is attached to the inside of the ball lending unit 360. When the ball rental unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a cash or prepaid card and the ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit. 300 can be lent (paid out) into the top plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. ing. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. In addition, the ball rental unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

[3-7. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Furthermore, FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In this embodiment, since the number of teeth of the driven gear 410 is twice the number of teeth of the drive gear 412, that is, the reduction ratio is selected as a value 2, the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is When rotated twice, the driven gear 410 that meshes with the drive gear 412 rotates once. The dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor whose output shaft rotates 15 ° in one step and rotates 360 ° in 24 steps. For this reason, when the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates 15 ° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to this output shaft also rotates 15 °, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410 so that the reduction ratio is 2 As a result, the dial operation unit 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates 30 ° together with the driven gear 410.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attachment portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support substrate 430 having a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface, having an opening 430a through which button support tube 416b and inner tube portion 401a of dial operation portion 401 can pass. Are fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 and A button decoration board 432 having a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting rolling, a pressure detection switch 432c for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a color LED 432d mounted on an upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405; It is equipped with.

  The dial operation part 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and a surface extending outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. And an annular top plate portion 401b on which a predetermined decoration (specifically, a design having smooth irregularities is applied) and a cylindrical shape extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b. The outer cylinder part 401c shorter than the inner cylinder part 401a and the flange part 401d extending annularly outward from the lower end of the outer cylinder part 401c are mainly provided. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 44) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected. Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By contacting the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be further prevented from entering the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 46).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through-hole 406a. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416g (see FIGS. 45 and 46) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is set so that the button body 406 does not come off the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a press detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower portion of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the press detection switch 432c of the button decorative board 432. The pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection switch 432c when the button body 406 (the pressure operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower side than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. The button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder 401a (see FIG. 46).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. The driven gear 410 is inserted into the button support cylinder 416b and the sliding surface 410a is brought into contact with the gear rail 416a so that the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends face each other and project inward, and these connection locking claws 410 b are provided in the dial operation unit 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432. Although details will be described later, between the rotation detection pieces 410c and 410c. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In the present embodiment, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same length.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial drive motor 414 alternately rotates the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) forward and reverse alternately in small increments, thereby rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise and counterclockwise. Since the rotation can be alternately repeated in small increments, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle at a predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, so that a click on the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416g that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 45 and 46), and a through-hole 416c that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and transmits light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection switch that is attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. 32a and 432b, an opening 416d through which the button support tube 416b passes vertically, an opening 416e through which the press detection switch 432c attached to the button decorative board 432 faces from the upper side, and downward from the lower surface. And a pair of board holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 penetrates in the vertical direction through a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation portion holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410, It has. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this embodiment) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f opening downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend long, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the long axis direction, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The upper cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one of the short axis directions (front-rear direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1) (front side in the pachinko gaming machine 1), and has a claw-like engagement with the lower end protruding outward. A piece 422c is provided. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 has the operation member holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial operation unit 401 and the like attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation part 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420e is provided. The lower cover 424 includes engaging portions 424b that can engage with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claw 422b with the lower cover 424.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the flange 401d) can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. .

  The operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover body 426, and detailed illustration is omitted. The operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) can be mounted with the lower surface slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). When the cover body 426 is hit or hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed so that the impact can be reduced.

  In the operation unit 400, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw with the front cover 428 removed, and then the cover body 426 is attached. The surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 includes the circumferential length of the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. The pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. As a result, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. From which detection direction of the dial operation unit 401 can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the detection switches 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, as will be described in detail later. Yes. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation for rotating in reverse.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, in the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button Since the cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed into the inner tube portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is applied to the stepped portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. Therefore, the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial driving motor 414 is chopped in a state where the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By alternately repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405. You can entertain your production.

  Next, dial vibration control that allows the dial operation unit 401 to vibrate by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation for rotating in reverse will be described. As described above, the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor, and its output shaft rotates 15 ° in one step and rotates 360 ° in 24 steps. For this reason, when the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 rotates 15 ° in one step, the drive gear 412 fixed to this output shaft also rotates 15 °, and this rotation is transmitted to the driven gear 410 so that the reduction ratio is 2 As a result, the dial operation unit 401 connected to the driven gear 410 also rotates 30 ° together with the driven gear 410.

  By rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 forward by one step and then rotating it backward by one step, such a one-step forward rotation and reverse rotation are alternately performed repeatedly, whereby the dial operation unit 401 is rotated. Can be alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise to create a state as if the dial operation unit 401 is vibrating. Since the surface of the top panel 401b of the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a design having smooth irregularities, the dial operation unit 401 is alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise in small increments. When the player's finger or palm touches the top plate portion 401b of the dial operation unit 401, the game is performed such that the finger or palm is moved by the smooth unevenness applied to the surface of the top plate portion 401b and vibration is applied. It is also possible to make people feel.

  Specifically, the dial excitation control that alternately and repeatedly rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 forward and reverse by one step is specifically performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100). The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 synchronized effect start command classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronized effect). When receiving a special figure 2 synchronization production start command or the like (see FIG. 122) classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronization production, the peripheral control of the power-on process of the peripheral control unit to be described later is performed based on the received command. Part normal processing (refer to steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 147), dial excitation according to schedule data for alternately repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 by one step. Take control. The dial vibration control schedule data defines the start time and end time of the dial vibration control, and is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150. . The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs dial vibration control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later (see step S1104 in FIG. 149).

  Next, rotation direction change control that can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise will be described. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is connected to the driven gear 410, and a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged on the driven gear 410 at regular intervals are detected by a pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. The direction of rotation is detected based on the detected pattern.

  In the rotation direction change control, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise, when the player's finger or palm touches the dial operation unit 401 and the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 stops, the rotation direction is changed. When the dial operation unit 401 starts to rotate counterclockwise or the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise, the player's finger or palm touches the dial operation unit 401 and touches the dial operation unit 401. When the rotation stops, the rotation direction is changed and the dial operation unit 401 is started to rotate clockwise. In a state in which the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is stopped, the rotation of the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation unit 401 is also stopped. Therefore, the dial drive motor 414 fixed to the drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410. The rotation of the output shaft is also stopped, and the dial drive motor 414 which is a stepping motor is stepped out. Thus, in this embodiment, the dial drive motor 414, which is a stepping motor, can be stepped out by the player's will, so that the player touches the dial operation unit 401 with his / her finger or palm. Thus, the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 can be forcibly stopped or the direction of rotation can be changed.

  Specifically, this is performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 synchronized effect start command classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronized effect). When receiving a special figure 2 synchronization production start command or the like (see FIG. 122) classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronization production, the peripheral control of the power-on process of the peripheral control unit to be described later is performed based on the received command. Rotational direction change control is performed according to schedule data for performing forward rotation and reverse rotation of the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 in the part steady processing (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 147). The rotation direction change control schedule data defines the rotation start timing and rotation end timing of the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is previously stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150. A plurality are stored. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is a rotation detection switch history creation process (see FIG. 152) executed as one process in the operation unit information acquisition process (see step S1108 in FIG. 149) in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Whether the dial operation unit 401 is stopped from the created rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST (in other words, is the dial drive motor 414 out of step)? In the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process (step S1104 in FIG. 149), it is ascertained whether it is rotating clockwise or counterclockwise. ), And turn direction control according to the schedule data

  For example, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a is currently rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST. If it is grasped that the dial operation unit 401 is continuously rotated according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 clockwise, the dial operation unit 401 is stopped (in other words, When the dial drive motor 414 is out of step) or when the dial drive motor 414 is rotating counterclockwise, rotation direction change control is performed according to schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise. .

  Further, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a is currently rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise, the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST. If it is understood that the dial operation unit 401 is rotating, the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for continuously rotating the dial operation unit 401 counterclockwise, whereas the dial operation unit 401 is stopped ( In other words, when it is understood that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step) or is rotating in the clockwise direction, the rotation direction change control is performed according to the schedule data for rotating the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction. Do.

  Thus, although both the above-described dial excitation control and rotation direction change control rotate the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 in the normal direction or reverse direction, the latter rotation direction change control has the dial operation unit 401. Is executed when an external factor occurs such as when the peripheral control MPU 4150a is actually rotating in the reverse direction to the intended direction or when it is stopped, the former dial excitation control Is completely different in that the period during which the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is rotated forward or reverse is set in advance and executed regardless of the occurrence of an external factor.

  In the rotation direction change control, when it is grasped that the dial drive motor 414 is out of step, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is suddenly changed to the reverse rotation direction. Then, since it is completely different in that the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated, in the rotation direction change control, the production of the sensation completely different from the sensation of production using the dial operation unit 401 created by the dial vibration control is the same. Can be created using the dial operation unit 401.

  Next, click generation control capable of giving a click feeling to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. Since the dial drive motor 414 is a stepping motor as described above, a static torque is generated on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 by maintaining the energization state (excitation state) to a specific phase of the stepping motor. Can do. Thus, in the present embodiment, a first static torque generation state in which an excitation state is maintained with respect to a specific one phase to generate a static torque, and an excitation state is maintained with respect to a specific two phase. A mechanism for generating a second static torque generation state that generates torque is employed.

  In the first static torque generation state, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated beyond the static torque in this state, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the driven gear 410 and the dial drive with the drive gear 412 fixed. When transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, the output shaft steps out and rotates step by step, that is, rotates by 15 °, and the operation of stepping out and rotating is transmitted as a click feeling of the dial operation unit 401. . Even in the second static torque generation state, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated beyond the static torque in this state, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the driven gear 410 and the dial drive with the drive gear 412 fixed. When transmitted to the output shaft of the motor 414, the output shaft steps out and rotates step by step, that is, rotates by 15 °, and the operation of stepping out and rotating is transmitted as a click feeling of the dial operation unit 401. .

  In the second static torque generation state, since the excitation state is maintained for the specific two phases, the second static torque generation state is 2 for the first static torque generation state in which the excitation state is maintained for the specific one phase. Double static torque can be obtained. In other words, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second static torque generation state is transmitted as twice the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state.

  The stepping motor is normally controlled so as to prevent step-out so as not to become uncontrollable. However, in this embodiment, the dial operation unit is controlled by performing step-out control of the stepping motor positively. A click feeling can be obtained in the rotation operation of 401, and the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the first static torque generation state can be lightly felt by generating the click feeling in two stages. On the other hand, the click feeling of the dial operation unit 401 in the second static torque generation state can be felt heavy.

  Specifically, the click generation control that can give a click feeling to the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is performed by the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 (see FIG. 100). The peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control unit 4150 is a command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 100) (for example, a special figure 1 synchronized effect start command classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronized effect). When receiving a special figure 2 synchronization production start command or the like (see FIG. 122) classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronization production, the peripheral control of the power-on process of the peripheral control unit described later is performed based on the received command. In the steady part processing (see steps S1009 to S1038 in FIG. 147), click generation control is performed according to schedule data for generating stationary torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The click generation control schedule data defines the timing for generating and stopping the stationary torque on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 100). Are stored in advance. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs click generation control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 149).

  Thus, the click generation control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is in a stopped state, whereas the rotation direction change control is executed when the dial operation unit 401 is rotating. It is completely different in that it is a thing. Further, in the click generation control, there is a feeling of clicking when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated, whereas in the rotation direction change control, the rotation direction is changed by preventing (blocking) the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. Since it is completely different in the point that it suddenly changes in the reverse rotation direction, in the click generation control, the same dial operation can be performed with a feeling that is completely different from the feeling of the effect using the dial operation unit 401 created by the rotation direction changing control. It can be created using the part 401.

  Here, torque-free control in which no static torque is applied to the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 will be described. In this torque-free control, all the phases of the dial drive motor 414 are in a non-energized state (non-excited state), and the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is torque-free. That is, even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, a load, a click feeling, or the like that prevents the operation is not generated at all.

  An effect that uses torque-free control will be briefly described. For example, an effect screen selected by rotating the dial operation unit 401 by operating the dial operation unit 401 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 95). In addition, a click feeling is given to the dial operation unit 401 by the click generation control described above, and when the player operates the dial operation unit 401 and rotates it clockwise or counterclockwise, The state where the click generation control is stopped and the torque becomes free, that is, the state shifts to the torque free control, and can be used for an effect that causes the player to select an effect screen that the player does not intend (scoop foot). In other words, in the click generation control, a static torque is generated on the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, whereas in the torque free control, the generated static torque is forcibly released so that the player's finger or Since the static torque, which is a load from the dial operation unit 401 applied to the palm, can be suddenly removed, the forced release of the static torque causes the player's finger or palm to feel a slip in the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. Will be granted.

  Thus, the present embodiment is based on a completely new idea of using a stepping motor as a man-machine interface in addition to the conventional idea of driving a movable body using a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, although not shown, the peripheral control MPU 4150a (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral control board 4140 performs operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later (step S1108 in FIG. 149). The dial operation unit 401 is stopped from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST created in the rotation detection switch history creation processing (see FIG. 152) executed as one process. Or whether it is rotating clockwise or counterclockwise, so that the player is independent of the progress of the performance (for example, The presence / absence of the dial operation unit 401 (effects other than linking and operating the dial operation unit 401 (productions for prompting operations, etc.)) It has to be able to view. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 to rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise when grasping that the dial operation unit 401 is operated by the player's finger or palm. Alternatively, a behavior of rotating counterclockwise is provided to rotate against the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by the player.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a rotates the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414 when the dial operation unit 401 understands that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by a player's finger or palm regardless of the progress of the production, and thereby the dial operation unit 401. Is controlled according to the schedule data for rotating the button clockwise or counterclockwise. The schedule data of this rotational behavior imparting control defines the rotational direction and rotational speed for rotating the output shaft of the dial drive motor 414, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b (see FIG. 100) of the peripheral controller 4150. A plurality is stored in advance. The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs rotational behavior imparting control according to the schedule data in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (see step S1104 in FIG. 149).

  As described above, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 recognizes that the dial operation unit 401 is being operated by the player's finger or palm regardless of the progress of the production, so that the dial drive motor 414 Since the behavior is given to the dial operation unit 401 by rotating the output shaft, the dial operation unit 401 suddenly starts to move. In other words, when the player performs a meaningless operation on the dial operation unit 401 that is completely unrelated to the production, the pachinko gaming machine 1 responds to this and the behavior is given to the dial operation unit 401. The player behaves so as to call attention so that the player does not perform meaningless operations on the dial operation unit 401. Such a behavior by the dial operation unit 401 can give the player an impression as if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is willing. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel playability by the operation member.

[3-8. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from behind. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle A rotating handle body front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and integrally rotatable with the rotating handle body rear 504, and disposed on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. Rotating handle body front 506 and rotation in cooperation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 includes a shaft member 510 that is mounted and fixed at the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side and has a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A potentiometer 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that can be rotated by being fitted to 510a and that is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the front surface of the handle base 502 so that the potentiometer 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502 and the potentiometer 512 The switch support member 514 having a through hole 514a through which the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 can pass, the touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member 514, and the touch switch 516 are the switch support member 514 A launch stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface; A single button 520 that is pivotally supported with respect to the support member 514 and activates the firing stop switch 518, and is disposed so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510, and the rotation handle body front 506 and the rotation handle body rear 504 are rotated in the original direction. A handle return spring 522 that urges the actuator to return to a position (rotation end in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle. Further, the front rotation handle body 506 and the rear rotation handle body 504 are rotated from the original rotation position to a limit rotation position (a rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) that is the maximum rotation position in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Move.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose front end side bulges in a hemispherical shape spreading toward the front side, and whose rear end side is opened in a cylindrical shape. In addition, three grooves 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 506a on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotating handle main body abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508 so that the rotation range of the rotating handle main bodies 504 and 506 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b protruding rearward is formed on the rotary handle main body front 506, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the switch support member 514, and the rotary handle body 504 is held by the handle return spring 522. , 506 are biased to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  The handle device 500 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined so as to face the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 5. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  In the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor. When the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 (handle device 500) are rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member 510. It will be. Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512. The game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the rotary handle bodies 504, 506, that is, the rotational position of the rotary handle bodies 504, 506.

  Note that the outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch switch 516 detects contact when the player touches the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is like that. When the touch switch 516 detects the player's contact, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 rotate, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball Can be typed in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the game hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational driving of the firing solenoid 654. It is like that. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500, the rotation operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is electrically detected by the potentiometer 512, and based on the detection of the rotation position from the potentiometer 512, the firing controller 4120 rotates the firing solenoid 654. Since the strength is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are closed when the door frame 5 is closed like a conventional pachinko gaming machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified, The occurrence of defects in the unit can be eliminated, and the player's interest is reduced due to a game ball driving defect. And it is capable to suppress.

[3-9. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 50 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball channels therein, and a front cover 544 that closes the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right as viewed from the front, a second sphere inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a, A second ball inlet 542c that communicates with the ball passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front is provided. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage 542d of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 receives the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b and the dish from the first ball outlet 544a. The unit 300 can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d and is pivotally supported on the cover base 542 so as to be swingable by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. And a full switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring 552 that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full switch 550. ing. As shown in FIG. 50, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is pivoted to the left in the front view. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a that protrudes outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full switch 550. . That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the storage space 546 is full of the stored game balls.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and plate-like earth metal fittings 556 that respectively cover the right end and the left end in the rear view of the cover base 542. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 through the foul cover unit 540. If the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 even when the upper plate 301 is full, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the normal passage 773 upstream of the full tank branch 770 becomes full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 72). The full ball exit 776 of the foul cover unit 540 has a second ball inlet 542c, a second ball passage 542d, and a second ball outlet. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 44b.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swing member 548 is detected by the full tank switch 550, that is, when the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 is stored is full, the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 on the payout control board 4110. Is stopped, and a notification is made to prompt the player to discharge the game balls in the tray unit 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is not detected by the full switch 550. It becomes detection, and payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[3-10. Ball transport unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. 51A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 51B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be supplied. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition portion 583a that is pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. A ball extending member 583 and an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 are sent one by one to the rear cover hitting hole supply port 582a. A ball feeding member 584 that is rotatably supported around the ball feeding member 584 and a ball feeding solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in the front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Each is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 581c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a which are separated from the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b below the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584 and bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 51), and a ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. The ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the collar portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feeding operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operation rod 586 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 587 that rotates around the axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feeding member 584 around the axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with a vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side engaging with the ball feed operating rod 586 of the engaging portion 587a. Is disposed on the opposite side, and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 52) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. In this embodiment, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feeding unit 580 transmits the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feeding operation rod 586 and the ball feeding crank 587 to rotate the ball feeding member 584. It can be moved. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 is applied with a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583d, but protrudes forward. The actuating rod 583c is in contact with the upper end of the abutment piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that the rotation is restricted. Then, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Note that the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by the coil spring, so that the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

[3-11. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is molded with synthetic resin, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. A transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has four pieces 592a which are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at the left and right ends and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate which extends in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extends downward. Shaped locking piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 23, FIG. 26, etc.).

  As described above, the door frame 5 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls arranged vertically below the vertically long oval gaming window 101. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. The handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is disposed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. Appearance with continuous integration.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. In addition, light emission decoration can be performed with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround the opening 328a of the lower plate cover 328. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, on the rear side of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. By turning on and off the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256 that are arranged, the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same emission mode (the emission color and the emission pattern are the same), the overall illumination pattern can be made substantially uniform. If it is, it can be set as the light emission decoration which was interrupted in the circumferential direction. It can be made into a light-emitting decoration, and can attract a player's interest strongly.

  In the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of aluminum alloy by die-casting, and the base member 420 is attached to the plate unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since the operation unit mounting portion 314c is suspended, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed to bend and the base member 420 is lowered. The contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c through the cover 424 can alleviate the impact on the dial operation unit 401, the pressing operation unit 405, and the like, and can prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged. It can be done.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is included together even if a player or the like tries to strike the pressing operation unit 405 strongly. Therefore, the impact hit by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the impact can be prevented from being concentrated to be hard to break. In addition, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly protrude from the upper surface from below. When the impact hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can contact the upper surface and receive the impact, it is possible to reduce the load on the operation portion holding member 416 and to prevent the gear rail 416a from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the plate unit 300 from the upper side, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to the replacement of the unit 400.

[3-12. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the arrangement of the light emitting decoration LEDs on the door frame. FIG. 54 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming center 101 in the left-right direction center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are translucent (in this embodiment, have a plating layer on the surface) by side decorative frames 202 and 242. The outer periphery is enclosed.

  Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the body inner portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The plate-shaped light guides 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend as far as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens units 210b and 250b. Has been. Although not shown in detail in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surfaces thereof, and the decorative substrates 214, 216 and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can diffuse light.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are provided. In this embodiment, LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper part). The normal luminance is lower than the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the decorative unit 280). In addition, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 in the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red LEDs.

  In this embodiment, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk Printing), white coating, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction. The upper center of the gaming window 101 is decorated. The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 arranged. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a blue-tinged transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a white (milky white) member having translucency. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface, and can diffuse and refract light, so that the light passes through the transparent central lens 282. When the inner lens 283 is viewed, the central lens 282 appears to be deep, and the central lens 282 itself appears to shine. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

  The upper decorative substrate 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 includes a plurality of (six in this embodiment) LEDs 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283, side lenses 284, and lower lenses 289. A plurality of LEDs 286b (two in this embodiment, one for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, respectively, arranged on the left and right sides) are provided on the rear side. In the present embodiment, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high brightness white LED. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, a plurality of jewel-like light guides 318 a in the upper dish upper lens 318 are formed along the front end of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. The front decoration member 316 is lined up so as to be exposed through the opening 316a. When viewed from the front, the upper side front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 allow the outer side of the lower side of the gaming window 101 to be shown in the figure. (Lower) is designed to decorate. Below the upper dish upper lens 318, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper dish upper inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318, and diffuses and refracts light. In the same way as the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 is given a deep and sparkling brightness to guide it. The light part 318a looks like a jewel. In addition, the upper dish upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are not seen from the player side through the light guide 318a by the upper dish upper inner lens 319.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality of (six in this embodiment) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318 a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper pan right decorative substrate 320 and the upper pan left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Moreover, the surface (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 is also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this embodiment) LEDs 430 b in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In the present embodiment, the LED 430b of the dial decoration board 430 is a white LED with high luminance, and the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214 a and 216 a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 254a, 256a are the first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 53 and 54) close to the gaming window 101, and the second annular group 103 (FIG. 53) arranged outside the first annular group 102. 54 and within the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 54, by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, a plurality of substantially concentric circles so as to surround the gaming window 101 ( In this embodiment, two) light emission decoration can be made. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are the first annular group 102 and the first ring group 102. A radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 53 and 54) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the bicyclic group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the annular shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LEDs 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side in the right side decoration unit 200 are set as the upper right side group 105. The portion (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. Group 106 is designated. The LED 286a of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference point of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. The LED 286 b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 is appropriately lit to decorate the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106, or above the gaming window 101 (including the upper part). It is possible to decorate the light emission in a V shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320 a corresponding to the light guide 318 a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316 a of the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300 decorating the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 322 a is a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated with light emission, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be illuminated and decorated. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. , 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems, a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three by three from the right side when viewed from the front. Further, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation unit group 109 have four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405 as a pair, and the front and rear 109a. One LED 432c corresponding to the two systems 109b and the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit full color, and 3 in actual light emission control. It has doubled 84 systems. The LEDs 286b and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected to each other. In actual light emission control, the number of systems is doubled to 8 systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, so that there are ten systems of the same number in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing and the like are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  In addition, by coordinating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000, the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 are provided. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it becomes possible to provide a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Moreover, in the 1st cyclic | annular group 102, the 2nd cyclic | annular group 103, and the lower group 108, light circulates the outer periphery of the game window 101 by light-emitting each system | strain 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 108a-108d suitably. Such as a light emission effect, or light moving toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, or light from the central lens 282 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect that moves. In the present embodiment, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, if it is divided into about 8 lines (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. Further, by emitting light individually from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to produce a light emission effect that the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

  Further, the central lens 282 as a whole emits light by simultaneously emitting light from the respective systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106, and light is rotated in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each of the systems 106a to 106c. Light emission effects can be performed. Also, the upper center side group 107 emits light, so that the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, so that the player has an opportunity and a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probable game) State, short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state when probability change, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from the player's head toward the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b. .

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect that makes the front edge of the upper plate 301 light up and decorating, or by emitting light in association with the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 or a light emitting effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, the system 109a, 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light, thereby prompting the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guiding the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. Can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation unit group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108 is provided. , 109 or each of the systems 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, a light-emitting effect can be performed with different gradations such as light-emitting color and brightness. An expressive lighting effect can be performed.

  Thus, in the door frame 5, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214 a, 216 a, 254 a, 256 a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210 a, 250 a are replaced with the first annular group 102 close to the gaming window 101. And the second annular group 103 distant from the gaming window 101 outside the first annular group 102 so that the light can be emitted, so that the outer side of the gaming window 101 (the gaming area 1100) is made up of a plurality of substantially concentric circles. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of providing a light emitting effect that is not available in conventional pachinko gaming machines by light surrounding the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and attracting the player's attention strongly. And can be.

  In addition, one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged in a substantially concentric manner, and even if the appearance looks like one, each LED of the two systems can emit light. Since the light emission decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit) by the light emission decoration can be made. 240) can be increased, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can attract the player's attention by increasing the impact of the light-emitting decoration can be obtained.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60. FIG. 55 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 57 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 58 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a front surface of the main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640 that are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end portion of the view and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600 A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 and an award for paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A ball outlet that is attached to the front surface of the ball unit 700 and the main body frame base 600 and blocks the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 opens with respect to the main body frame 3. Open and close Is provided with a knit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[4-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. 61 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 62 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is located in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth. As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding portion that can be fitted and held on the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part. A mouth frame 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess recessed from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 toward the rear. 110, a door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of 110, an upper bent protrusion 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5, and an open side protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the outer bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 55) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate-like shape in which the lower end hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and the lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 62). As shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. The ball striking device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 57, FIG. A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The played game balls are received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 59 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the lower rear wall portion 604. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper front end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear side below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 are engaged with and locked by the locking projections 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000, and the front end frame 602. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 57).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends gently and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially horizontal center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 substantially at the horizontal center. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that allows the game ball to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. A game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is provided. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although not described in detail, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 is appropriately provided with mounting bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the hitting ball launcher 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like. Is formed.

[4-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are respectively attached to the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws on the upper and lower rear surface mounting brackets 610 of the main body frame base 600. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 57 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper (not shown) for regulating the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side, which is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642b. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft bracket 640 is in a state where the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft bracket 644 overlap (contact) with each other in the front-rear direction, and the door frame shaft bracket The front extension part 642b of 642 and the front extension part 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 in a state where they are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. ing.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The door 642c is positioned on the same axis, and the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support 642 in the lower shaft support 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[4-3. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The firing solenoid 654 attached to the ball, the striking ball 656 fixed to the rotational drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the striking ball 656, and the movement of the tip 658. A base of a predetermined position on the trajectory extends obliquely to the upper left when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652, and between the launch rail 660 and the launch rail 660 at the upper end of the launch rail 660. At the same time that the tip 658 is allowed to pass, a gap is formed in which the game ball cannot pass and the game ball is held at the proximal end of the firing rail 660 The stopper ball 656 (tip 658) is restricted from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the stop piece 662 and the ball stop piece 662 can be hit. And a stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is not shown in detail, but the rotational drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. . Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape to the axis of the rotation drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a hook portion 656b with the hook tip 658 fixed to the tip at a normal direction, a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the hook portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween, and a stopper portion 656c capable of contacting the stopper 664 It has. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 87) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hit ball launching device 650 has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, and can absorb the impact when the hit ball 656 abuts and can suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. It is like that.

  As shown in FIG. 57, FIG. 87, etc., when the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is substantially the center in the left-right direction and the lower rear wall portion. The upper end of 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601), and the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 extending downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end and the lower end. The hit ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. It has become. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4130 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is used. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launcher 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side, so that the launch solenoid 654 is driven simultaneously with the ball feeding solenoid 585 of this ball feeding unit 580 ( ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. Yes.

[4-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72. FIG. 65 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen after being disassembled. FIG. 71 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the pachinko island equipment side to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island equipment in the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The payout is made to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on the rear surface (see FIG. 68).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so as to be along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 is disposed on the side of the prize ball tank mounting part 711 (on the right side in the rear view) on the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a and the external terminal plate 784. And an external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the external terminal plate cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the rear side of the upper side lower end of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball device 740 to the rear side of the vertical side, and a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 downward. And an attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the rear wall portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the back. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted, the mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the winning ball tank 720, the winning ball device 740, etc., or mounting to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned on the winning ball base 710. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in a plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 A hook portion 724 extending to the rear, a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the flange portion 724 in plan view, and a prize ball formed near the base end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front sides of the outer peripheral wall portion 722 Place tank 720 on prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl shape with a predetermined depth with the upper part open, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 72) that opens downward on the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 67) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above. The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and that can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball presser plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not been made one level by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls flowing down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 731a on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. The game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731 so that the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 that is rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734b in the tank rail 731. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 and the like, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 in the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b having a predetermined space communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b in communication with the lower left side (open side) and bent substantially in a letter shape. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741, and a plate-like motor support plate 743 disposed below the back cover 742. The payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can rotate integrally. A first gear 745 that is fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and a unit base 741 that meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the shaft, and a dispensing rotator 7 that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741. 8 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed so as to be integrally rotatable on the opposite side with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection slits 749a are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. A detection board 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and is used to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the game ball attached to the unit base 741 and flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c. , A rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit 749a formed in a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a back cover 742 holding the rotation angle switch 752. The award attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 through the connection between the rotation angle switch board 753 attached to the rear surface, the payout motor 744, the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 and the payout control board 4110. And a ball case inner substrate 754.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball case inner board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board). 749), and a gear cover 756 that covers the rotation angle switch board 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. A supply passage grounding metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and a back cover 742 detachably attached to the unit base 741. And a detachable button 759 for supporting.

  In the prize ball device 740, a rear cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the opened rear ends of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are closed. It has become so. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a switch mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting switch 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and the front and rear direction below the prize ball passage 741c. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball to be played, the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 750. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball break switch 750 (a state where the ball is broken), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball has run out. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball case inner board 754 and the board cover 755 on a substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board A rotation angle switch board mounting portion 742c that is disposed on the lower side of the mounting portion 742b for mounting the rotation angle switch board 753 and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  In the present embodiment, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate, and comes into contact with a metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and heat generated by the payout motor 744. Can be radiated easily.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are equally formed (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detecting board 749. The rotation position of the dispensing rotary body 748 can be detected by detecting the detection slit 749a with the rotation angle switch 752 respectively. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749 (payout rotator 748) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the payout motor 744.

  In the prize ball device 740, a payout motor 744 rotates when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. Thus, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotating body 748 on the front side and a rotation detecting board 749 fixed on the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. The payout rotating body 748 and the rotation detecting board 749 are fixed together with the third gear 747. It is designed to rotate. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation of the payout rotating body 748 is designed so as to correspond to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 744.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting switch 751 and delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls discharged to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d by the ball extraction passage 741d from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d are a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank branching unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit 800. Can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 67, 68 and 72. FIG. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 72). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 72) that guides the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that circulates through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward to the front of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full passage 775 (see FIG. 72) that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in the rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 72) for guiding the game ball received at the reception port 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is released forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 is in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first ball inlet 542 a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and passes through the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300. The game ball discharged from the full ball outlet 776 is supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal ball outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out of the upper plate 301 from the 544a stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 through the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  As described above, when the game ball becomes full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branching unit 770 automatically lowers the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is eliminated. Since it can be supplied to the plate 302, the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko game machine, and the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball removal button of the upper plate, so that the game ball Can be prevented from being interrupted, and the annoyance during the game can be eliminated to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  As described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full tank branching unit 770 branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are directly driven by the hitting ball launcher 650. The amount of game balls stored in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the past are stored in the upper plate 301. be able to. Therefore, by reducing the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a high appealing power to the player who plays, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

[4-5. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. 73 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 75 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held on the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 rotates around the axis in which the opening / closing crank 793 extends in the front-rear direction, so that the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction at the same time as the driving pin 793c is inserted. The open / close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[4-6. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from after being disassembled. FIG. 80A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 80B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view of 860, and a main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 is configured to extend long in the left-right direction. The substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually inclined upward toward the left and right ends, and forward from the front. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding to the upper side, an opening portion 812 that is disposed on the upper side of the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is lowered by one step in the center in the left-right direction, and that penetrates in the front-rear direction, A board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end, and a cylinder penetrating in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in front view A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the duct portion 814 and the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. And 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. In addition, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily through the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a lower speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a heavy bass with respect to the diameter of the lower speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The firing power supply substrate 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 that charges and discharges power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are provided. The combined current combined with the current generated by the discharge from the ball is driven by passing the current through the launch solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing. Since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, a slit 830a as a heat radiating hole is formed on the side surface of the launch power supply substrate box 830 where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed. . Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall to the lower surface. Thus, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface, which communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is formed as a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slit 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. The launch power supply board 831 can be easily handled by reducing the size thereof, and the replacement work of the launch power supply board 831 is facilitated, which can contribute to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830 can be replaced. Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be solved very easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be eliminated at an early stage to resume the game.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a direct current power supply from the alternating current power supply of the pachinko island facility, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with, its lifetime is very long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current to flow through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. The electronic components accompanying the long-term secular change can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 through the body frame base ball extraction passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 is formed. The game ball that has flowed down to the bottom and the game ball that has been discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, through the discharge passage 842 to the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 79, a power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed such that the dimensions in the front-rear direction when assembled with each other are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened forward. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 97) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In the present embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 56). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820 and a frame peripheral relay terminal attached to the rear face of the board base 871 and fixed to the rear panel relay terminal 872 toward the rear. A board 868, a gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 and having the CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed to the rear, a peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and a CR unit relay terminal 873 A substrate cover 874 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871 so as to face the substrate. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko island facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connection with a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so that they face the front side of the main body frame base 600 from the front side. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the front side of the relay terminal plate cover 692. Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance (see FIG. 55 and the like).

  Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining rental display unit 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch in the tray unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and switches 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[4-7. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 81A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 81B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows that protrude downward and are pivotally supported by a back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. Engaging pieces 908 respectively engaged with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a horizontally long rectangular shape extending along the lower side on the left side of the connection notch 910 when viewed from the front. The confirmation opening 912 and a confirmation notch 914 that is cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front are provided.

  The back cover 900 can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the shaft support pins 906 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. Although not shown in detail, the left side of the back cover 900 as viewed from the front is the rear surface of the prize ball unit 700 by a predetermined screw in addition to the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a. It is supposed to be fixed to.

  Further, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 so that the RAM clear switch 4100e, the test terminal 4100f, and the like of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 face the rear side through the connection notch 910. It has become. Further, the back cover 900 is configured such that a sealing seal (not shown) of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the main control board box 1170 through the confirmation notch 914. The sealing portion 1176 faces the surface. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the operation check and the appearance check of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be performed.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated in the main body 902 and the side portions 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side.

[4-8. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. A rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the visual right direction. The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d.

  The side security plate 950 is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952 d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. Can be done. The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

[4-9. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. 82A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 83A is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 83B is a slide for a glass door frame and a slide for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows a bag, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 85 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding door for the glass door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the anti-fraud member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the lock device 1000 is a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001 b (see FIG. 84) that contacts the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper end portion and middle portion of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 84) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the protrusion 1003 is provided, and from the lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusions 1004 are attached to the door hook holes 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 611. Also, the lock attaching portion 625 is fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared to the case where the side surface 1001b is dense.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of each of the long rivet holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted through a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, or the like. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 86 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (the biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 protruding forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600 (see FIG. 57, FIG. 61, etc.) It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. The rivet slot 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is slid into the door frame. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to disturb the ascending operation of the ridge 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has the guide protrusion 1043 inserted through the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. The escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is reliably engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1053 that connects the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1040. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch portion 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet slot 1042 and the rivet slots 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. While being overlapped, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are used. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base body 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005. .

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIG. 85, when the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 85A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 85A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the main body frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 on the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the locking device 1000 cannot perform an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. It has become. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are in contact. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. 86 (B). The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 86 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and a lock formed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. Although the structure in which the attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 attaches the lock attachment piece 1008. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated and screwed up and down of the cylinder lock penetration hole 611. FIG. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with rivets or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall. It is good also as a structure, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

[5. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 is a front view showing the gaming board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko gaming machine removed. 88 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 91 is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state where it is attached to the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 89 and the like as seen from the front, and FIG. 93 is a game as seen from the rear of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 94 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 92 cut in the vertical direction.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, it is provided (see FIGS. 95 and 96).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 of the game board 4 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is partitioned by the inner periphery. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the hit ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is moved. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the urging force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (or has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Also, the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projecting piece 182 prevent unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire entering from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 from reaching the game area 1100. Be able to.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 that is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and is formed in an arc shape on the upper side and recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 90). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface Inside, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the board holder 1160. However, it is discharged | emitted from the out ball | bowl discharge | emission part 1161 below. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All of the game balls discharged from the player pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1150 and then fitted with the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 90, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end of the rear surface of the rear surface in the rear surface, and a fixing portion. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[5-4. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 whose rear side is opened and a thin horizontal box shape that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is opened on the front side, and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1172 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 90 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right end part in the back view when sandwiching the elastic fixing pieces 1175, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking at any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In the present embodiment, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut or peeled off. In this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing are left. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position. The RAM clear switch 4100e and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 with high crime prevention performance and Can be done.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  On the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 91, one LED for displaying a game state that is changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end when viewed from the front. And a special symbol memory display for displaying the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the upper start port 2101, which is composed of a gaming status indicator 1183 and two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the gaming status indicator 1183. 1 segment and one 7-segment LED for displaying the first special lottery result, which is placed on the right side of the upper special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving the game ball into the upper start port 2101 as the first special symbol The upper special symbol display 1185 and the upper special symbol display 1185 are arranged diagonally to the right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and are extracted by receiving a game ball into the lower starting port 2102. The lower special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result obtained as a second special symbol, and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186 And a lower special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of holdings related to the reception of game balls to the lower starting port 2102.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of suspensions related to the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game balls that are arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for performing, and a normal lottery result which is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2350 disposed below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 made up of one LED and the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, the big prize opening 2103 And a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions of the open / close pattern (number of rounds).

  The gaming status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 is a full-color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the combination of the emission color, lighting and blinking, Various gaming states (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed.

  Further, when the upper special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot variably display the first special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185, when a game ball is received at the upper start port 2101, The number of the first special symbol on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. In addition, the special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs. The first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on / off. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off when the number of holdings is one, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holds is 3, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of held is 4, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the lower special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 may receive a game ball to the lower start port 2102 when the second special symbol cannot be variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186. It displays the number of retained (stored number) of the second special symbol whose start of variable display is suspended (stored). The lower special symbol memory indicator 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs. The second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on / off. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off when the number of reserved is 1, and the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are used for the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game balls into the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. The special lottery result is displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result or the like depending on the emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The player can recognize the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a full-color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2350. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  In addition, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In the present embodiment, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs. Numbers can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the upper special symbol memory display 1184, the upper special symbol indicator 1185, the lower special symbol indicator 1186, the lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 of the function display unit 1180, The normal symbol display 1189 and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 97). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table Since the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the gaming board 4 that is embodied by the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different, Let the player or the sales hall clerk recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. It has to be able to bet.

[5-6. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, the front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if a failure nail (not shown) is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. The thickness is 8 to 10 mm. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this embodiment, And a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 that is recessed in a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the rear side. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this embodiment) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 96) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from protruding rearward of the panel holder 1220. 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1) can be securely installed in the game board holding port 601.

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001 in the back box 3001. Is omitted))). In the present embodiment, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 92, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed on the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 93) that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and that opens at the lower end side downward. And a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it is possible to set the panel plate 1210 to the conventional obstacle nail planting device with the panel holder 1220 held, and to suppress the cost for planting the failure nail. Can be done.

  Although not shown, the gaming panel 1200 is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. A front unit 2000 can be attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the rear side of the gaming area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position of the obstacle nail, winning hole, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used as a replacement part. At the same time, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210. .

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It is like that.

[5-7. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, the detailed structure of the game board 4 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.95 and FIG.96. FIG. 95 is a detailed front view of the game board. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG.

  The gaming board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and an outer periphery of a gaming area 1100 in which a game ball as a gaming medium is driven when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that forms a partition, and a position that is visible from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front component member 1110 when viewed from the front. A plurality of openings 1158 (see FIG. 1), which are attached to the function display unit 1180 and the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrate the front and rear in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100. 96) and the front unit 2 attached from the front side to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 00, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1150, the.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disposed between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is placed behind the game panel 1150 with respect to the light-emitting decorative holes that are perforated so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500 inserted from the side, and a liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image that can be viewed from the player side according to the gaming state; A board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear face of the board holder 1160 are provided.

[5-7-1. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged at an approximately lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 above the out port 1151 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and on the left side of the attacker unit 2100, the game area A side prize opening member 2200 disposed along the outer periphery of 1100 and supported by the front surface of the gaming panel 1150; a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 disposed at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100 and supported by the gaming panel 1150; It has.

  The front unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the gaming area 1100 in the gaming panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1150. A portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is positioned in the game area 1100. As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nail implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, Can be changed. The table unit 2000 can decorate the game area 1100.

[5-7-1a. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 has a plurality of entrances (winning entrances) in which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. The upper start port 2101 disposed substantially at the center, the lower start port 2102 disposed below the upper start port 2101, and the lower start port 2102 disposed below the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 Are also provided with a rectangular prize-winning port 2103 that extends greatly in the left-right direction, and a general prize-winning port 2104 that is arranged slightly on the left and right sides of the big prize-winning port 2103. The game balls received in the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the big winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the gaming panel 1150.

  The upper start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by a start port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 97) is disposed between the lower start port 2102 disposed below the upper start port 2101 and the upper start port 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 rises substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 In a state where the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, a game ball can be received in the lower start port 2102. That is, the lower start opening 2102 is a variable winning opening by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2105 based on detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2107 is pivotally supported at its lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the big prize opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is rotated, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be received. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2103 is closed in the normal gaming state, and a lottery is drawn when a game ball is received (starts winning) into the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102. Depending on the lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”), the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 97) is driven to open and close.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received in the lower start port 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received in the big winning port 2103. The game ball detected by the lower start port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. An upper start port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the upper start port 2101 and a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning port 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000 described later. ing.

[5-7-1b. Side prize opening member]
The side prize opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is an opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed, at the lower part of the game panel 1150 in the left-right direction from the center in the left-right direction. On the other hand, after being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and is back-to-back along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to line up with the general winning port 2104 on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 2100. Two general winning ports 2201 are provided so as to face each other. These two general winning holes 2201 are opened upward so that gaming balls can be received (winning) at all times. The gaming balls received in the general winning holes 2201 are guided from the front side of the gaming panel 1150 to the rear side. Then, it is detected by a general prize opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  Further, the side prize opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end of the side prize opening member 2200, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with the two general winning holes 2201 sandwiched therebetween, and the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower start opening 2102 and the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100) A second shelf 2203 that becomes lower toward the game area 1100), and the first shelf 2202 can bring the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 toward the center of the game area 1100. It can be done.

  Note that the two general winning ports 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game balls are brought closer to the center of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. A third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center side of the game area 1100 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning ports 2201.

  The side prize port member 2200 is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side prize port decoration board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decorative board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the side prize opening member 2200. Can be decorated with light emission.

[5-7-1c. Center character]
Further, the center accessory 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and then the game panel 1150. As shown in the figure, it is fixed to the front surface and is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 1100. It is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the diameter is formed, and the left outer peripheral surface is a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 1100. Is formed.

  The center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left side from the position slightly on the right side in the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall portion located on the front surface of the game panel 1150. When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300 and to the right of the upper shelf 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (entered) passes through the right side of the center accessory 2300 and flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at a stroke. In other words, if the game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center object 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced. It is possible to appropriately adjust the length, and to maintain a sense of tension and to suppress a loose game.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 has entered the warp inlet 2302 in which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 and the warp inlet 2302. A warp exit (not shown) that releases the game ball into the frame, and a game ball released from the warp exit rolls in the left-right direction, and then releases it into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame in 2300.

  Although the detailed illustration of the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is omitted, the game ball released from the warp outlet is supplied, and the game ball is placed on the front side of the first stage from the first stage. A second stage that is supplied and is capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. This stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 through which a game ball can enter is formed at the rear side of the first stage at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The game is discharged from the exit 2314 into the game area 1100. As shown in the figure, this chance exit 2314 is arranged immediately above the upper start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game balls released from the chance exit 2314 are received into the upper start opening 2101 with a high probability (winning prize). To do).

  The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, the decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 is visible from the player side. It has become.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 is a transparent member extending leftward so as to be substantially in contact with the inner rail 1112 above the warp entrance 2302 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. An arch portion 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left side of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch part 2315.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 includes a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of a game ball in the vicinity of the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. This gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance that is placed on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion above the arch portion 2315 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. A gate switch 2352 for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. In the present embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate outlet of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is The portion 2315 can be seen as if diving.

[5-7-2. Panel lens member]
The panel lens member 2500 of the gaming board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 penetrates in the front-rear direction in a circular or X shape at a position outside the opening 1158 into which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the gaming area 1100 in the gaming panel 1150. The plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed in such a manner are decorated with light emission. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of light emitting decoration holes disposed on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510. The upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, the transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to the plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and the rear side of the lower panel lens 2520 And a lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 protrude forward from the plate-like lens base portion, and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides that have substantially the same shape as the light emitting decoration hole to be inserted. Department. In a state where the insertion light guide portion 2502 is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. The game ball is not affected as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can illuminate and decorate the area where the game ball flows even if an opaque game panel 1150 such as a veneer plywood is used by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate. In addition to being able to show the player the decoration of the gaming panel 1150 that has never been seen before, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be conspicuous and differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

[5-7-3. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance rearward as shown in the figure. The back box 3001, the upper unit 3002 disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and the back box 3001 The gear decoration body unit 3500 disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mainly provided.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side prize opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 in the vicinity of the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A side lamp decoration board 3014 and a game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning port 2201 of the side winning port member 2200, and a game received in the left general winning port 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 A left guiding member 3016 for guiding the ball downward, and a right that is disposed on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and guides the gaming ball received in the upper start opening 2101 and the right general winning opening 2104 on the attacker unit 2100 downward. The guide member 3018 is mainly provided.

  Further, although the back unit 3000 is not shown in detail, a horizontally long rectangular lamp drive board box that is disposed in the lower rear portion of the back box 3001 and accommodates a lamp drive board 4170 (see FIG. 99), and a back box Panel relay terminal board 4161 (see FIG. 97) fixed to the rear side of 3001 and arranged on the left side in the rear view of the lamp driving board box, and a horizontally-long rectangular upper resistor arranged on the upper rear side of back box 3001 And a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 and detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be characterized. Further, the back unit 3000 is configured such that each unit 3100, 3400, 3500 can move independently or in conjunction with each other depending on the gaming state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a game or a chance, and to entertain the player.

[5-7-3a. Back box]
The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and the game panel 1150 is provided via the fixing portions 3001a. It is fixed to the rear side. Further, the back box 3001 is formed with a rectangular opening substantially at the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side through this opening can be viewed from the player side. Furthermore, the back box 3001 is provided with mounting portions at appropriate positions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like.

  Although not shown, the back box 3001 is a liquid crystal that inserts and locks one fixing piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the right of the opening in the rear view (right side in the rear view). A support member is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening in the rear view. The other fixing piece 1902 (left side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is supported by the lock member. A device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-7-3b. Guide member]
The left guiding member 3016 in the back unit 3000 guides the game balls received in the general winning port 2201 of the side winning port member 2200 and the general winning port 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths. A general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper start opening 2101 and the right general winning opening 2104 on the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The upper start opening switch 3022 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the upper start opening 2101, and the general winning opening switch 3020 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the right general winning opening 2104. The right guide member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 that can detect magnetism.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160 and are discharged downward from the game board 4 from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160. It has become so.

[5-7-3c. Upper unit]
The upper unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a horizontally long shape, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is disposed on the front surface at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and is circular in a front view, and a lifting mechanism that moves up and down the rotational decoration body unit 3200. 3250, a swing decorative body unit 3300 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the lifting mechanism 3250, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  The rotating decorative body unit 3200 of the upper unit 3100 is moved up and down by an elevating mechanism 3250 between an ascending position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a descending position located substantially at the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Can be done. The rotating decorative body unit 3200 is configured such that a rotating decorative body formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface is rotated, and by rotating, the rotation radius of the rotating decorative body is increased by the centrifugal force. It is like that.

  In this rotary ornament body unit 3200, not only the rotary ornament body rotates at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the rotation radius of the entire rotary ornament body is enlarged and the appearance is greatly changed. It is possible to have a strong impact on the player, to entertain the player, to suppress the interest in the game, and to attract the player's interest strongly Thus, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko gaming machine that is greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

  Further, the swing ornament body unit 3300 of the upper unit 3100 includes swing ornament bodies arranged on the left and right sides of the rear so as to be adjacent to the rotary ornament body unit 3200 positioned at the ascending position, depending on the gaming state. Thus, the left and right swing ornaments can be swung in the left-right direction at the same time. Furthermore, the movable ceiling unit 3350 of the upper unit 3100 is provided with plate-like ceiling decoration bodies that extend in the horizontal direction at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. This ceiling decoration body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as a center, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decoration body is lowered in a descending direction according to the gaming state. It has become.

[5-7-3d. Sub LCD unit]
As shown in the figure, the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 includes a three-dimensionally shaped character body, and the character body moves from the right end position toward the center side in the left-right direction according to the gaming state. Can be moved to.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached to the character body of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 from the back side. This sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state together with the liquid crystal display device 1900 or independently. In the character body of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400, a plurality of decorative LEDs 3400a, which are full color LEDs, are arranged around the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

  On the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, a liquid crystal output board box 3421 that accommodates a liquid crystal output board 3420 for receiving drawing data from the peripheral control board 4140 and transmitting it to the lower board, and a liquid crystal output board 3420 The sub liquid crystal relay board 3422 for accommodating the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422 for relaying the drawing data transmitted by the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 and the drawing data transmitted by the liquid crystal output board 3420 via the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422. A sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 in which a sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 for receiving and driving the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is accommodated, a sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430, a sub liquid crystal relay substrate box 3423, and a liquid crystal output substrate Removably attached in the order of box 3421 To have. Each of the sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430, the sub liquid crystal relay board box 3423, and the liquid crystal output board box 3421 protrudes outward from both upper and lower sides and includes a fixing piece (not shown), and is attached to the back box 3001 through the fixing piece. It is supposed to be.

[5-7-3e. Gear decoration body unit]
The gear decoration body unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 includes a plurality of gear-shaped gear decoration bodies that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in the vertical direction. The body rotates all at once.

[5-7-4. Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. Yes. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing piece 1902.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral board box that houses a peripheral control board 4140 on its rear side.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 98 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 97, and FIG. 99 is the payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays an electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 97, and FIG. FIG. 102 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 102 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 97, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 4100 will be described, and then the payout control board 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

[6-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 97, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100c to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100d, and a RAM clear switch 4100e for completely erasing information stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 4100a. . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”) and main control built-in RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), and prevention of fraud. These functions are also built in. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM, and this non-volatile RAM has a unique code for identifying an individual by a manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a (a code having only one in the world). ) Is stored in advance. The ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, and therefore cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  95, an upper start port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, a lower start port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102, and a general winning port 2104 A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball that has entered the ball is first input to the main control input circuit 4100c and input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b. 95, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the general winning port 2201, and a big winning port 2103 are entered. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 for detecting a game ball and a magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 96 for detecting fraud using a magnet is first a panel attached to the game board 4. The signal is input to the main control input circuit 4100c via the relay terminal plate 4161 and input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, so that the start port solenoid 2105 and the attacker are connected via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. The drive signal is output to the solenoid 2108, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol memory through the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191 from the main control I / O port 4100b. A drive signal is output to the display 1184, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  In this embodiment, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas Contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used for the prize opening switches 3020 and 3020. This is because game balls frequently enter the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2350, so the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 Detection of game balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used as the upper start port 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. Further, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the winning ball opening 2103 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switches are used as the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110 in a serial manner, and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Etc. are received in a serial manner. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140. Here, a main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in a serial manner will be described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, is connected to the bus 4100ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 106). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (FIG. 106). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea, and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is started as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 103) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100e is also output to the payout control board 4110.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 98, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of game balls and the like performs the discharge control by the payout control unit 4120 for performing various controls relating to payout, the launch solenoid 654, and the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 585. 66, a launch control unit 4130 that performs control, an error LED display 860c that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 860c, And a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation. .

[6-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 98, a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout is a payout control MPU 4120a that is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. In addition, the payout control I / O port 4120b as an I / O device and the external watchdog timer 4120c for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4120c”) are described. ), A payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, a payout control input circuit 4120e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, and the CR unit 6 CR unit input / output for exchanging various signals It includes a road 4120F, a. The payout control MPU 4120a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) in addition to the built-in ROM. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various information (game information) related to games from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payouts in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4120b, or clears the RAM from the main control board 4100. An operation signal (detection signal) of the switch 4100e is input via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 flow down. A detection signal from the counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball to be played is first input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the prize ball case inner board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and then paid out via the payout control I / O port 4120b. It is input to the control MPU 4120a. The detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 are first the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball case inner board 754. To the payout control input circuit 4120e, and to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as the payout control input circuit 4120e. To the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120e via the main door relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball case inner board 754, and indicates the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the display unit 860c is output to the error LED display unit 860c via the payout control I / O port 4120b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to the payout control I / O port. The number of game balls actually paid out is transmitted to the main terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4120b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 860c is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860c include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the payout rotating body 74 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b that communicates with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball mesh with each other in the vicinity of the entrance thereof to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Indicates that there is a problem with the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751, and when the number “5” is displayed, it indicates that it is a “retry error” (specifically, Notification that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full tank” (specifically, from the full tank switch 550) Based on the detection signal, it is notified that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” ( That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the output control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it means that “in stock” (specifically, Is informing that the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the lending apparatus connection terminal board such as a game ball. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is received by the payout control I / O port 4120b via the input / output circuit 4120f and input to the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and rents a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c. It outputs to the apparatus connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[6-2-2. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 98, the launch control unit 4130 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4130c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4130c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4130b so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e.

  A touch switch 516 that detects whether a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4130a via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the firing timing control circuit 4130c. When the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4130a and input to the launch timing control circuit 4130c. Yes. A signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 is first applied to the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. To the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d.

  Based on the signal from the potentiometer 512, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4130d generates a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle body front 506. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. In response to this, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e generates a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is received. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 103) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-2-3. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 99, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays the electrical connection between the boards. Between the board of the payout control board 4110 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the frequency display board 365 and the game ball lending device connection terminal. The board and the board 869 are electrically connected to each other by wiring (harness). In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown), together with the ground LG. These are supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frequency display board 365 via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 869.

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending switch 365a, which is a pushbutton switch, mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the lending button 361 of the lending unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining frequency display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display section 363 of the rental unit 360.

  The ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The ball lending switch 365a is turned on when the ball lending button 361 is pressed, and this ball lending operation signal TDS is input to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. It has become so. The return switch 365b is turned on (turned on) when the return button 362 is pressed, and the return operation signal RES is input to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. It has become.

  The remaining frequency indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a line. Of these three-digit segment indicators, one-digit segment indicator is sequentially driven, so-called dynamic lighting system is used for three digits. The segment display is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The remaining frequency indicator 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicator, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for designating the contents to be lit up and displayed are input from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. In accordance with the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, the one-digit segment indicator is sequentially lit, and the contents of the three-digit segment indicator luminescence remain unrented. It can be visually recognized through the display portion 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball rental state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  When the ball rental button 361 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS is input from the frequency display board 365 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball, the CR unit 6 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY. The game ball and the like lending apparatus connection terminal board 869 is configured to output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a). The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal board 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has been started or ended, to a lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a hall clerk or the like is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  When the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES is input from the frequency display board 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 ejects the prepaid card from an insertion port (not shown). To be returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount obtained by subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball rental button 361 being pressed.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. And a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 for performing sound control of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, calendar information for specifying the date, and time for specifying the hour, minute, second Real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 holding information, music and sound effects flowing from speaker 821 provided on main body frame 3 and speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on door frame 5 Etc., and a volume adjustment volume 4140a for adjusting the volume by rotating the knob.

[6-3-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 99, a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control includes a peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and will be described later. Various information (for example, a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing schedule data to be performed and schedule data for defining light emission modes such as various LEDs, etc., and various information to be continued across the day (for example, a big hit gaming state has occurred) Information for managing history and special performance files Peripheral control SRAM 4150d for storing information for managing the management of the peripheral control, and peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 4150e" for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally) And). Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the game board 4 is detached from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Loses its contents because it can no longer hold. The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, a hardware reset is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs and / or the plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 are provided as serial I / O for the lamp driving board. Motor drive game board side motor drive data for transmitting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 from the port to the lamp drive board 4170 Transmission from the board serial I / O port to the motor drive board 4180, dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, etc. The door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the electric drive source is framed from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Frame decoration drive amplifier that transmits door-side emission data for transmitting to the decoration drive amplifier board 194 and outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on the decoration boards of the door frame 5 From the board LED serial I / O port, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. 43, the detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the pressure detection switch 432c for detection is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is converted into a door-side serial transmission circuit. To the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

[6-3-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 101, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I's. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 4150af. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads / writes data from / to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Independent of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa and the input / output devices such as the port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to transfer data, the peripheral control ROM controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h are connected to the storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, peripheral control Reading and writing are performed via the bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, the hardware reset is performed. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral count CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count and is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, or an upper decoration in the door frame 5 A lighting signal of the LED 286b mounted on the upper decorative board 286 of the unit 280 is output. As described above, the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected directly, the path between the LED 286b and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take measures against noise in the lighting control of the LED 286b having a significant meaning in games. Note that the lighting control of the LED 286b is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than the LED 286b are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 are controlled. , 262, music and sound effects flow. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the player is more likely to enter a gaming state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume from the mute to the maximum volume is adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a described later) by a program. So that the can Rukoto. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 are used. Although production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, 222, and 262 are reduced, a large volume (in this embodiment, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when a player is cheating, , Maximum sound volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. Announcing that there is a high possibility that the volume developed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be made more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, and that the screen will be more advantageous to the player and the game state will be advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

[6-3-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various types of schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and a sound generation schedule for generating music, sound effects, and the like. Data, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects out of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or may be executed in various control program copy areas 4150cd of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some copies are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150b includes a brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. ing. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM 4165, and the acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information is currently set with luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, is included. For example, from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first When June has already passed since the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the brightness of 80% is further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to the 75%. Thus, the backlight brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the backlight is turned on, and December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to 75%, to 85%. Lights up.

[6-3-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
A peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150ca that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. A copy of various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the various control program copy area 4150cd for storing the dedicated data and the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control data copy area 4150ce stored for use, backup non-management target work area 4150cf for storing, in a dedicated manner, information that is not the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs, Is provided. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the power-on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 122) Each state effect start is instructed (for example, the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated) is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” is a state in which the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received when the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since a V blank signal that informs the user is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Therefore, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” are appended respectively (effect information (1fr) and effect backup information (1fr) described later have the same meaning). “(1 ms)” is a 1 ms timer interrupt, as described later. Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are appended (production information (1 ms) and The effect backup information (1 ms) described later is also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 and / or a plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 are provided with lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals. This is a storage area in which the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for output is set, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. Is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is set, and is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the reception command storage area 4150cac. A storage area in which various commands are received and the received various commands are set, and an RTC information acquisition storage area 415 The cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a described later) is set. The schedule data storage area 4150cae is received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the received command. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and a drawing state. An information acquisition storage area 4150cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150ca. Includes various information (for example, in the operation unit 400) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like created based on detection signals from the various detection switches provided. In the status information acquisition storage area 4150cak, the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and when it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it outputs it to inform that effect. Connection between the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 and the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 based on a LOCKN signal described later. A storage area acquired information a defect frequency and occurrence of defects states in is set.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[6-3-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is that the power-on command (see FIG. 122) from the main control board 4100 is stored in the RAM when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure). Even when the clear effect start and the respective state effect start are instructed (for example, the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated) is cleared to zero. Not. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from the backup first area 4150db to the backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

[6-3-2. Liquid crystal and sound control unit]
Drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 are performed. As shown in FIG. 100, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 has a built-in sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and the liquid crystal display device 1900 and In addition to various character data on the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, music, sound effects, and the like are included in the sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data, serialized music, sound effects, etc. And a, and audio data transmission IC4160c to be transmitted towards the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as chromatography audio data.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to the VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Then, it is set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control. The schedule data storage is triggered by the input of the V blank signal after extraction from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  When the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is received by the sub liquid crystal driving board 3425 via the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the drawing data as abnormal data. If the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 determines that there is, a LOCKN signal to be described later is input from the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 and the liquid crystal output substrate 3420.

[6-3-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is inputted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the inputted screen data as shown in FIG. VRAM for generating drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 by extracting sprite data and displaying it on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). ”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the liquid crystal display device 1900 via the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 from the channels CH1 and CH2. The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 via the liquid crystal output board 3420, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is supplied to the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422. Then, the data is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 through the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425. In this way, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 via the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, so that the wiring length required for the path from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is short. Since the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, and the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is output from the channel CH2. Since the length of the wiring required for the route up to becomes longer, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, with respect to the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data becomes long, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 described later uses “V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. The sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output board 3420 is serialized and output to the sub liquid crystal driving board 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals and output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

  Note that game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. 95 is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the lamp driving board 4170. The lamp drive board 4170 that has received the game board side light emission data outputs a drive signal to the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422 based on the game board side light emission data. Accordingly, the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a, and the plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a are gradation-lit, lit, or blinking. Can be done.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is inputted. Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the screen data and sprite data is created and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or sub liquid crystal display device 3450 for one screen (one frame). Is generated on the built-in VRAM, and the generated drawing data is output from the channels CH1 and CH2 to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is generated on the built-in VRAM. It is data to do.

  Here, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output board 3420 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 102, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Yes. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Each of the green video signal and the blue video signal is composed of 8 bits and a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the sub liquid crystal transmitter. It is input to the IC 3420a. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  Three video signals such as a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals such as a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Are input to the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a includes three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock. These three signals are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. Via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. And it transmits to the liquid crystal driving substrate 3425.

  A signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 via the forced switching circuit 3420c. In addition to the signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, the forced switching circuit 3420c outputs from the liquid crystal output board serial I / O port built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140. The LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 3420d and inputted. The differential circuit 3420d serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during a period when the startup screen when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or during a period when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is demonstrating in a customer waiting state. Does the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 described later have a problem in connection between the transmitter and the receiver? In order to confirm whether or not, the operation confirmation request of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is transmitted. Forcibly switching circuit 3420c, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in differential circuit 3420d are input, circuit connection is made to transmit these two signals, while differential When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 3420d, the circuit is configured so as to transmit a signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. Yes. Thus, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differencing circuit 3420d, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 3420d while being transmitted to the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, In order to make a circuit connection so as to transmit a signal output from the liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, a signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the liquid crystal output during the period when the startup screen when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or during the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the waiting state. The LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the board serial I / O port to the liquid crystal output board 3420 (differentialization circuit 3420d).

  When receiving the serial signal (serial data), the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 restores various signals serialized in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 to parallel signals and outputs the parallel signals to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. When the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 transmits a LOCKN signal to notify that fact. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the liquid crystal output board 3420. Peripheral control MPU 4150a, based on the input LOCKN signal, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, generates an image for notifying that effect by controlling sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and outputs it to liquid crystal output substrate 3420 for liquid crystal display device The information is displayed on the display area 1900 for notification.

  When the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output board, the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422 sends a LOCKN signal to be described later. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the liquid crystal output board 3420. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not defective when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no failure has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there has been a failure in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. The notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is transmitted through the liquid crystal output board 3420 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Information output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 and notification to that effect (For example, “a malfunction has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device”) is output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. provided on the door frame 5 by controlling the built-in sound source VDP 4160a and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. A notification sound flows. Thus, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. provided on the door frame 5. . At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 5 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 (various LEDs electrically connected to the various decorative boards via wiring) are turned on. May be.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900, and informs that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received. Is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 also accepts screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a when drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output from the channel CH2 to the liquid crystal output board 3420. A V blank signal indicating that it is ready is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, for example, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM), and the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) stores the drawing data. In this method, the held drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number An output channel is set, and music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 Incorporates a sub-volume value that adjusts

  Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to the setting mode described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. . The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies up to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified effect sound to obtain audio data as audio data The data is output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value, and thereby the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and The volume flowing from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 is set to be an allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually provided to the speaker 821 and the door provided on the main body frame 3. It amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the frame 5, serializes the amplified effect sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Adjust the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used And the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the volume value. 3 is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the speaker 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data. .

  Here, when the production sound flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs. A brief explanation of the control that plays the alarm sound to notify the hall clerk, etc. is as follows. First, the sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the track in which this production sound is incorporated. Sound data, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the notification sound volume is set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume flowing from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5. That was amplified to a master volume value, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound in the audio data transmission IC4160c as audio data serialization. That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided in the door frame 5, but the production sound is the sound generation schedule data described above. Is progressing according to.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and this predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far is the substrate volume that has been adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. (At this time, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated to shift to the setting mode and are adjusted, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. So as to flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. Going on.

  As described above, when the production sound flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the fraud to the pachinko gaming machine 1 When a notification sound flows to notify the store clerk etc. of the action, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is heard from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5. Although the flowing production sound is flowing in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period of time and the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5. When it stops flowing from 222 and 262, the production sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but the notification sound starts to flow for a predetermined period of time. So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound to the point.

[6-3-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 102, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b draws main liquid crystal character data for drawing various images in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and various images in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. In addition to a large amount of character data composed of sub liquid crystal character data, various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are stored in advance.

[6-3-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
As shown in FIG. 102, the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, and relays the frame periphery as differential serial data with the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. The frame peripheral relay terminal is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. The data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided on the door frame 5. The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as differential serial data on the left and right sides between the peripheral control board 4140 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, plus signal of left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[6-3-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 100, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The production based on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can be developed. As such effects, for example, if it is December 25, the screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Or the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set liquid crystal display device 1900. Brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the above. Further, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information are first stored as information on the date, time, hour, minute, and second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to perform ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is a cold cathode tube type. Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the date / time and the hour / minute / second when the input date / time information is input on the production line as the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. Is set to the manufacturing date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes pachinko games such as brightness setting information and input date / time information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of the model information of the machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or dark depending on the backlight luminance of the liquid crystal display device 1900 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the hall environment where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. It may be too much. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 43, it becomes possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the luminance of the backlight to a predetermined luminance. Yes. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing a setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, or the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a desired luminance. it can. The adjusted desired brightness is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type, the secular change of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. Corrects the brightness drop caused by. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date / time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and hour / minute / second specifying the date. Luminance adjustment information for acquiring the time information to be specified, specifying the current date and time, and adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. And brightness setting information having the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, the peripheral control ROM 4150b responds. When the correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, the correction information is acquired for the 75%. The backlight luminance of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5% to 80%, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on first. If December has already passed since the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10) is read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. ), And when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, the correction information obtained by adding 10% to the 75% is further added 85 The luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is%. The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information that is set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[6-3-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured to rotate the knob portion to adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5. , 262, music and sound effects flow.

  In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announces contents related to game effects (for example, announces that the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is more powerful, announces that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player, etc. .) Also flows from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. The notification sound and notification sound are used for volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on any at all, and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) is controlled by a program from the mute level to the maximum volume level. So that the it can be adjusted to your.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 are used. Although production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, 222, and 262 are reduced, a large volume (in this embodiment, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when a player is cheating, , Maximum sound volume) can be played.

  Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. Announcing that there is a high possibility that the volume developed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be made more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, and that the screen will be more advantageous to the player and the game state will be advantageous to the player. You can also do it.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the setting mode can be entered to adjust the volume of music or sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing a setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume.

  Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. . This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. There are two methods: adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation to adjust the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame 3 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, or a demonstration is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the customer waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a certain period, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the operation is performed according to the screen of the setting mode. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the unit 400, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. If the volume of the hall clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time and enters a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), The volume adjusted by the player who is sitting on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who sits down and plays a game can increase the sound volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. When the player who has played the game feels loud and adjusts the volume, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game this time It is possible to reduce the sound volume to a desired level by operating 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[7. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 103 and FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 104 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. Note that the grounds of the various substrates and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851 although not shown.

[7-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 79 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the power supply board 851 includes a full-wave rectifier circuit 851a, a power factor correction circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and a + 24V creation. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectification circuit 851a performs full-wave rectification of AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor improvement circuit 851b. This power factor improvement circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c smoothes + 37V by removing the input + 37V ripple, and + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, + 12V creation circuit 851f, + 24V creation circuit 851g, payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. The + 5.2V creation circuit 851d creates a direct current + 5.2V (DC + 5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system supplied with this + 5.2V is a + 5.2V power supply line. The + 5.25V creation circuit 851e creates a direct current + 5.25V (DC + 5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system supplied with + 5.25V is a + 5.25V power supply line. The + 12V creation circuit 851f creates a direct current + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system supplied with + 12V is a + 12V power supply line. The + 24V creating circuit 851g creates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The power supply system supplied with + 24V is the + 24V power supply line. The voltages created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Note that the AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is also supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

  The power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source for a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. This is a backup power source for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  As described later, + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC1”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, as for the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, current flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC1; An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns to the payout control board 4110 and then from the payout control board 4110 back to the power supply board 851. 2V can be applied and charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, but the stored contents are retained by applying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC0”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, the power from the + 5.2V generating circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode MD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 from the supply control board 4110 and the supply control board 4110 again from + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d. Depending on the connection method, + 5.2V is applied and charging is possible. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. It has become so.

[7-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be described.

  Three types of voltages, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 103, and the main control board is passed through this payout control board 4110. 4100 is also supplied. The four voltages + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control board is provided via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. On the other hand, among the four types of voltages, three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  As shown in FIG. 104A, the four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are driven by the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a and a drive signal is output from the drive source drive circuit 4180a to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the game board 4, and two types of voltages, + 24V and + 37V, are displayed on the liquid crystal display. Supplied to the device 1900. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a that is controlled for drawing and a backlight power supply circuit 1900b that creates a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. + 24V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a and + 37V Is supplied to the backlight power supply circuit 1900b, and among the four types of voltages, one type of voltage of + 12V is supplied to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420. In addition to the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a shown in FIG. 102, the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 creates + 3.3V from + 12V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”). A circuit 3420b and the like are provided. The + 3.3V generated by the + 3.3V generation circuit 3420b is supplied to the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the like.

  Of the four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140, three kinds of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V are supplied to the lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170. Various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal are output from the lamp driving circuit 4170a to the sub liquid crystal driving board 3425 through various decorative boards and / or the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422 of the game board 4. .

  The sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 is supplied with a voltage of LCD + 12V obtained by branching + 12V in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 in addition to three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V via the lamp driving substrate 4170. Various types of voltages are relayed to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425.

  The sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is supplied with four types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, +24 V, and LCD +12 V via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422. Although + 12V and LCD + 12V are originally the same voltage, a wiring pattern is formed on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 so that + 12V and LCD + 12V are not electrically connected. This prevents a + 12V closed-loop power supply circuit from being formed by electrically connecting + 12V and LCD + 12V. The sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 has a power supply for the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 from + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 3425a in addition to the + 3.3V creation circuit 3425a that creates + 3.3V from the LCD + 12V. A backlight power supply circuit 3425b for creating a sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 and a decoration LED 3400a which is a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged around the character body of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. The sub-liquid crystal display device includes various circuits such as a decorative LED driving circuit 3425c and the like, and + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creating circuit 3425a and the backlight power source created by the backlight power circuit 3425b. 3450.

  + 5.25V is supplied to the decoration LED drive circuit 3425c, and + 12V and + 24V are supplied to the decoration LED 3400a which is a full color LED. A plurality of decorative LEDs 3400a arranged around the character body of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 to which the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached include two systems in which three full color LEDs are electrically connected in series, and four full color LEDs. Is composed of two systems electrically connected in series, and has a total of 14 full-color LEDs. A full-color LED consists of three LEDs, red, green, and blue, in one package. The red forward drop voltage Vf is about 2V, whereas the blue and green forward drops. Since the voltage Vf is about 3V, when three full-color LEDs are electrically connected in series, the blue and green Vf are about 9V, and when four full-color LEDs are electrically connected in series, Blue and green Vf are about 12V. For this reason, + 12V is supplied to two systems in which three full-color LEDs are electrically connected in series, while two systems in which four full-color LEDs are electrically connected in series are supplied. , + 24V is supplied. In other words, the decoration LED 3400a, which is a full-color LED, may be supplied with + 12V or may be supplied with + 24V. Based on the drive signal from the lamp drive board 4170 input to the decoration LED drive circuit 3425c, the decoration LED 3400a may be supplied with + 12V. It is lit, lit, or flashing. Note that the decoration LED drive circuit 3425c receives a drive signal from the lamp drive board 4170.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 104 (b). Among the three types of voltages, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creation circuit 194a to create DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”). In addition to the three types of voltages, the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 supplies four types of voltages including + 9V generated by the + 9V generation circuit 194a to various decoration substrates of the door frame 5.

[7-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 through the diode PD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b detects signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4140. Is transmitted to the backlight power supply circuit 1900b, and is also transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and through the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the door frame 5 It is transmitted to various decorative boards.

  In addition to + 12V and + 24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120e of the payout control unit 4120, and + 24V is, for example, payout of the payout control unit 4120 It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4120d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is not used at all in the payout control board 4110 and is supplied to the launch power supply board 831 as it is via the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply substrate 831 creates a predetermined voltage, which will be described later, from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the firing control unit 4130.

  Thus, by providing the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b on the payout control board 4110 on the main body frame 3 side, it is not necessary to mount the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b every time the game board 4 is manufactured. It can contribute to reduction.

  Here, in this embodiment, the reason why the payout control board 4110 includes the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be briefly described. As described above, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V from the power supply board 851 are supplied to the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110. In other words, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V from the power supply board 851 provided on the main body frame 3 side are closest to the main control board 4100 provided on the game board 4 side as a transmission path. It is supplied via a payout control board 4110 provided on the third side. As a result, compared to the case where the power supply board 851 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit, it is possible to monitor the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure in a relationship closer to the main control board 4100 as a transmission path. By shortening the transmission path for transmitting the notice signal to the main control board 4100, it is possible to contribute to speeding up the timing at which the main control board 4100 starts backing up important game information. Further, the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line is monitored by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power supply lines of the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared to the case, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure. In addition, in recent pachinko machines, by providing an extremely large number of electrical decorations on door frames and game boards, etc., it provides players with a gorgeous production and powerful and attractive production. It tends to increase. Along with this, power consumption has increased, and opportunities for improving power supply boards have increased. On the other hand, the payout control board is a board that exclusively performs a game ball payout operation and the like, and therefore, there is very little opportunity to remake without significant system improvements related to payout. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the reasons described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is not provided with the configuration provided in the power supply board 851, but the configuration provided in the payout control board 4110 is used.

[7-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100g in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control filter circuit 4100g is supplied with + 5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100c and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and the like, for example.

[7-2-3. Voltage supplied to launch power board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the launch power supply substrate 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create direct current + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”) to drive the firing solenoid of the launch control unit 4130 in the payout control board 4110. This is supplied to the circuit 4130d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”) is grounded, while the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”). Is electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the dispensing control board 4110. It has become. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

  As described above, + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, whereas + 5.25V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Yes. + 5.2V and + 5.25V are control reference voltages for each control board, but when electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via wiring (harness), the total length of wiring, that is, For the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 having a short power path, +5.2 V is supplied from the power board 851 because the voltage drop (voltage drop) associated with the wiring can be estimated small. In contrast to the peripheral control board 4140 and the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, the total length of the wiring, that is, the power supply path is longer than that of the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100. The lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and various decorative boards on the door frame side subordinate to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, etc. Since the voltage drop caused by the wiring (voltage drop) can not be ignored, it is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 + 5.2V is higher voltages + 5.25V is supplied from the power supply board 851.

[8. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, and FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 4100g shown in FIG. 103 will be described, followed by the power source, main control system reset IC, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, main control I / O port created by the main control board 4100. Various input / output signals such as 4100b and a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the main control board 4100 has a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal as a peripheral circuit in addition to the main control MPU 4100a, the main control I / O port 4100b, and the main control three-terminal filter MIC0. A main control crystal oscillator MX0 (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz)) that outputs a clock signal is mainly configured.

[8-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the main control filter circuit 4100g is mainly composed of a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, +5.2 V is applied to the first terminal from the power supply board 851 through the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. + 5.2V from which the noise component is removed from the terminal No. The + 5.2V applied to the first terminal is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC component folded on voltage) by the electrolytic capacitor MC0 grounded to the ground (GND).

  + 5.2V output from the third terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) that are grounded. It has become. The smoothed + 5.2V is the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the main control I / O port 4100b. Applied to the VCC terminal or the like, which is the power source terminal.

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded capacitor MC3, the VCC terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded capacitor MC4, and the VDD terminal And + 5.2V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is grounded to the ground.

  In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and is also electrically connected to a capacitor MC5 grounded. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the capacitor MC5, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 via the resistor MR0. Connected. That is, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM, The voltage is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC0. Thereby, as described above, when the power from the + 5.2V generating circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is not supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is changed to the main VBB. Is supplied to the main control board 4100, the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, but the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM The memory contents are held by applying the main VBB.

[8-2. Main control system reset IC]
As shown in FIG. 105, + 5.2V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port 4100b, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to a grounded capacitor MC6, and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC6. . Specifically, when + 5.2V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal that is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal that is the reset terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR1. The voltage raised to the + 5.2V side is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC7 grounded and grounded (the capacitor MC7 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal and the main control I / When the voltage input to the RESETN terminal of the O port 4100b is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN of the main control I / O port 4100b. Input to the terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the RESETN terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are negative logic inputs, the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value. The O port 4100b is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor MC8, and + 5.2V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with the grant, and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[8-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 105, +5.2 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100g is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to a capacitor MC9 that is grounded and grounded, and + 5.2V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed +5.2 V is also input to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal that are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5.2V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a clock signal of 24 MHz is input. The main control MPU 4100a to which this clock signal is input outputs a clock signal from its E terminal. The E terminal is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and a 24 MHz clock signal output from the E terminal is input. The terminal between the E terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the CLK terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded, and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. ing.

[8-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100c receives detection signals from the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e and a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 103 are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input and a circuit to which the power failure warning signal is input will be described. .

[8-4-1. Circuit to which detection signal from RAM clear switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 105, the third pin as the output pin of the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR4. Connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR4, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the resistor MR5 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR6 and electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The 1st and 2nd pins of the RAM clear switch 4100e are grounded and the 4th pin is electrically connected to the 3rd pin. Thereby, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the third pin and the fourth pin are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, while when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the third pin And the 4th pin is pulled down to the ground side by being electrically connected to the 1st pin and the 2nd pin.

  The circuit composed of the transistor MTR0 and the resistors MR4 and MR5 is a switch circuit. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated, the voltage pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3 is the base terminal of the transistor MTR0. Is applied to the transistor MTR0, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I / O port 4100b. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground side, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR6 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input pin PA0 of the main control I / O port 4100b. Is done.

[8-4-2. Circuit where power failure warning signal is input]
As shown in FIG. 105, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b on the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 via the resistor MR8. Connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR8, the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is also electrically connected to a resistor MR9 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR10 and electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b. It is connected to the. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b that outputs a power failure warning signal is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded, and is pulled up to + 12V by a pull-up resistor MR7. Thus, when the power failure warning signal is not input, the pull-up resistor MR7 pulls it up to + 12V side, while when the power failure warning signal is input, it is pulled down to the ground side.

  The circuit composed of the transistor MTR1 and the resistors MR8 and MR9 is a switch circuit. When no power failure warning signal is input, the voltage pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR7 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1. When applied, the transistor MTR1 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the power failure warning signal 1 in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the main control I / O port 4100b. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled down to the ground side, whereby the transistor MTR1 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR1 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor MR10, and the power failure warning signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is applied to the input pin PA1 of the main control I / O port 4100b. Entered.

  The detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR3, whereas the power failure notice signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR7. This is because the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 4100e is input to the main control board 4100 while the power failure warning signal is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is + 5.2V. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a high voltage. As a result, the detection signals from the general prize opening switch 3020, the upper start opening switch 3022, and the lower start opening switch 2109 input to the main control board 4100 are pulled up in the same manner as the detection signals from the RAM clear switch 4100e. Detection from the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352, which is input to the + 5.2V side by the resistor and input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. The signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the power failure warning signal from the payout control board 4110.

[8-5. Various input / output signals such as main control I / O port]
Next, various input / output signals of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control I / O port 4100b will be described. The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control I / O port 4100b exchange various information and various signals with the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the main control MPU 4100a via the data bus.

  Serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 97 is input as a payer serial data reception signal to the RXA terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the main control MPU 4100a, output serial data to be transmitted to the payout control board 4110 from the TXA terminal as a main payment serial data transmission signal. The serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 shown is output as a main circumference serial data transmission signal.

  To the input pin PA2 of the input port PA of the main control I / O port 4100b, the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 that informs the completion of normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal is the main control input. For example, the upper start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 97 is input to the other input pins of the input port PA and the input pins of the ports set as the input ports among the ports PB to PE that are input through the circuit 4100c. Detection signals from various switches such as are input via the main control input circuit 4100c. Various detection signals input to the main control I / O port 4100b are input to the main control MPU 4100a via the data bus.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payer serial data reception signal from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the main control I / O port 4100b via the data bus. Then, a drive signal from the output pin of the port set as the output port among the ports PB to PE, for example, to the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 97 is sent via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d. Or output a drive signal to various displays such as the upper special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG.

[8-6. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with + 12V and + 5.2V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the reliability is improved by transmitting using + 12V which is a voltage higher than + 5.2V which is the control reference voltage.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control board 4100 mainly includes a pull-up resistor MR20, resistors MR21 and MR22, and a transistor MTR20 as a communication interface circuit. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly composed.

  An electrolytic capacitor in which + 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD20 of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is grounded to the ground. It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of MC20 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD20 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, power from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The charged charge can be continuously applied as + 12V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 105 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the electric charge is applied as + 5.2V, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 by this applied + 5.2V is at least the main control MPU 4100a built-in. The main peripheral serial data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae can be transmitted. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V that is higher than the control reference voltage + 5.2V. That is, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the main control MPU 4100a can complete the transmission of the main peripheral serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit. Even if a main peripheral serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 by the voltage + 5.2V, a main peripheral serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI by the + 12V is supplied from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20. Cannot output. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC20 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. The main peripheral serial data set in the transmission buffer register of the serial transmission unit of the main control MPU 4100a can be output from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 as a main peripheral serial data transmission signal with logic HI by + 12V. Yes. This ensures that the peripheral control board 4140 receives the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data, without being interrupted. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 105 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor MR20, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR21. Electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR21, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is also electrically connected to the resistor MR22 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground side. The transistor MTR20 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5.2V side from the pull-up resistor MR20, the transistor MTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. Will be. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5.2V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the negative terminal. Is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 that is grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground, and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC is +5 by a pull-up resistor AR11 electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. .2V is pulled up to the side and electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal as the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Is input to the input terminal. Thus, as described above, when power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous interruption. Can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is + 5.2V. When power or instantaneous interruption occurs, by applying +5.2 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is at least The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is transmitted. Data is reliably received by the peripheral control board 4140 without being cut off or being lost.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground side and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the main serial data whose logic becomes HI. While the transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is LOW. When Since the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5.2V from the pull-up resistor MR20 and the transistor MTR20 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on, so the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to is grounded is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, + 5.2V supplied to various electronic components via the main control filter circuit unit 4100g, that is, the reference control voltage generated by the + 5.2V generating circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 is +5. A power failure or momentary power failure occurs between the + 5.2V power supply line to which 2V is applied and the + 12V power applied through the diode M20, that is, the + 12V power line to which + 12V created by the + 12V creation circuit 851f is applied as the communication control voltage. Measures are taken when the reference control voltage and the communication control voltage are reduced. In other words, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, a plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 having the + 5.2V power supply line and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit unit 4100g as the first auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the reference control voltage applied from the +5.2 V power supply line decreases due to the electrical connection between the terminals and the main control filter, By applying the reference control voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the circuit unit 4100g, the state where the reference control voltage is applied can be maintained, and the pull-up resistor MR20 and the resistor MR21 are maintained. , MR22, and + 12V for the interface circuit comprised of transistor MTR20 + 12V applied to the source line is applied as a communication control voltage to the anode terminal of the diode M20, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD20 and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 which is the second auxiliary power supply are electrically connected in parallel. Thus, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication control voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD20 decreases, communication from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 that is the second auxiliary power supply By applying the control voltage, the state where the communication control voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 from being broken, and to prevent omission of the command, so that the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  A plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all composed of a pull-up resistor MR20, resistors MR21 and MR22, and a transistor MTR20 as main peripheral serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC20 so that transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the interface circuit. Thus, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are all sent as peripheral peripheral serial data via the interface circuit. Since the transmission to the control board 4140 can be completed, the peripheral control board 4140 can reliably receive a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without being broken or missing.

[9. Discharge control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, FIG. 108 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of a payout control unit, FIG. 109 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, and FIG. 110 is a CR unit input / output. FIG. 111 is a circuit diagram showing a launch control input circuit, and FIG. 112 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. is there. First, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b will be described, and then to the payout control filter circuit 4110a, the payout control unit 4120, the launch control unit 4130, various input / output signals with the main control board 4100, and the external terminal board 784. Various output signals will be described.

[9-1. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control board 4110 is supplied with + 24V, + 12V, and + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and + 24V and + 12V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b monitors + 24V and + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure signs. When a power failure or instantaneous power failure sign is detected, a power failure notification signal is provided as a power failure notification, and the payout control unit 4120 has a payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, the data is output to the main control MPU 4100a. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by monitoring of + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and + 12V power failure or power failure monitoring.

[9-1-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 107, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, an open collector output type comparator PIC21, a D-type flip-flop PIC22, and a transistor PTR20 (in this embodiment, 2SC1815). Yes.

  + 5.2V is applied to the REF terminal, which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, and the K terminal, which is a cathode terminal, via a resistor PR20, and current input to the REF terminal is applied to the resistor PR20. Limited by. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator PIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495V is set). The reference voltage Vref is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC20 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC20 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator PIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (PIC21A) is used for comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied to the + terminal. The reference voltage Vref is input to the negative terminal. The remaining one (PIC21B) is used to compare the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref, the + 12V monitor voltage V2 is input to the + terminal, and the reference voltage Vref is input to the-terminal. Yes. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (PIC23A) is used in this embodiment. Note that + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator PIC21, is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC21 connected to the ground. Further, + 5.2V input to the D-type flip-flop PIC22 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC22 grounded.

[9-1-2. Monitoring of + 24V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 24V blackout or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the PIC21A of the comparator PIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 107, + 24V is distributed in voltage according to the resistance ratio of the resistors PR21 and PR22, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC23 grounded and grounded, and is input to the + terminal of the PIC 21A (the capacitor PC23 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR21 and PR22 become a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in the present embodiment) when + 24V is blacked out or momentarily stopped, and the voltage starts to drop from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the + 24V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW, but the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type as described above. Pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR23, its logic becomes HI, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 grounded to the ground, and input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 (capacitor) The PC 24 also serves as a low-pass filter). Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is larger than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 is performed from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure warning signal 1 is not output to the I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref and as a result the logic becomes HI, but the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type, Becomes LOW, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 connected to the ground, and the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, a power failure warning signal 1 is sent from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 to the payout control I / O port 4120b. Is output.

[9-1-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V blackout or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the PIC21B of the comparator PIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 107, the voltage of + 12V is distributed according to the resistance ratio of the resistors PR24 and PR25, the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC25 grounded and grounded, and is input to the + terminal of the PIC 21B (the capacitor PC25 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). The values of the resistors PR24 and PR25 are set to a power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47 V in the present embodiment) preset when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref. When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes LOW, but the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type as described above. The voltage is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR23, and its logic becomes HI, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 connected to the ground and input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is higher than the reference voltage Vref, the payout control of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 is performed from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure warning signal 1 is not output to the I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and as a result, the logic becomes HI, but the comparator PIC21 is an open collector output type. The ripple is removed by the capacitor PC24 that is grounded and grounded, and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. Since the PR terminal is a negative logic input, when the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 is smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the power failure warning signal 1 is sent from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 to the payout control I / O port 4120b. Is output.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR26. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is also electrically connected to the resistor PR27 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor MR7 of the main control input circuit 4100c shown in FIG. 105 via a wiring (harness). As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal is raised to the + 12V side and transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning signal. That is, the transistor PTR20 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded. As described above, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 and the payout control I / O port 4100b pay out between the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 and the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4100b. Since it is mounted on the control board 4110, the power outage notice is performed by the power outage notice signal 1 which is an ON / OFF signal using the control reference voltage + 5.2V, whereas the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the ON / OFF using + 12V that is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage + 5.2V is used. A power failure notice is given by a power failure notice signal which is an OFF signal.

  Further, a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, from the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 98 via the payout control I / O port 4210b. It is like that. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the payout control I / O port 4210b. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 releases the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal is inverted. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the payout control MPU 4120a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I / O port 4210b and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop PIC22 is configured to set the latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state with the logic being LOW at the PR terminal. Note that the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal, the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal, and the GND terminal that is the ground terminal are grounded. Further, the negative logic 1Q terminal obtained by inverting the logic of the 1Q terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-2. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, +5.2 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded, and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5.2V is output. The + 5.2V applied to the first terminal is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the electrolytic capacitor PC0 grounded with the ground (GND).

  + 5.2V output from the third terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 that are grounded. The smoothed + 5.2V is a Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c, a VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and a payout control I / O port. The voltage is applied to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of 4120b.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded capacitor PC3, and the VCC terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b is electrically connected to the grounded and grounded capacitor PC4. Further, + 5.2V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, is grounded to the ground.

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and is also electrically connected to a capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the capacitor PC5, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 via the resistor PR0. Connected. That is, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, The voltage is applied to the + terminal of the capacitor BC1. As a result, as described above, when the power from the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM does not flow. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB.

[9-3. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. In addition, a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) is mainly configured as a peripheral circuit. Here, the external WDT 4120c will be described first, followed by a payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, a payout control input circuit 4120e, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f, various input / output signals such as a main control I / O port, Various input / output signals such as the payout control I / O port will be described.

[9-3-1. External WDT (external watchdog timer)]
As shown in FIG. 108, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the external WDT 4120c. The external WDT 4120c resets the payout control MPU 4120a and has a built-in watchdog timer. The external WDT 4120c has a function of monitoring the voltage of + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal and a function of monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4120a is operating normally, and is input to the Vcc terminal. When the voltage of +5.2 V reaches a threshold value (in this embodiment, it is set to 4.2 V), a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal or the payout control I / O from the payout control MPU 4120 a. If the external WDT clear signal is not input to the CK terminal within the clear signal release time via the O port 4120b, a reset signal is output from the negative logic RESET terminal.

  The TC terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC6, and the RCT terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR1 pulled up to the + 5.2V side. The clear signal release time described above can be set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC6 and the resistance value of the pull-up resistor PR1. In this embodiment, a time 35 ms (= 1.75 ms × 20 times) corresponding to 20 interruption timers (1.75 ms) of the payout control MPU 4120a is set as the clear signal release time.

  The negative logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is electrically connected to the RST0 terminal that is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal that is the reset terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The negative logic RESET terminal is an open collector output type, and is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR2. The voltage raised to the + 5.2V side is smoothed by removing ripples by the grounded and grounded capacitor PC7 (the capacitor PC7 also serves as a low-pass filter). When the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is greater than the threshold value, the negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I When the voltage input to the RESETN terminal of the / O port 4120b is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW and the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Input to the terminal.

  The negative logic RESET terminal is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR2 when the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is switched from ON to OFF within the clear signal release time and the external WDT clear signal is released. The logic becomes HI and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b, while the external WDT clear signal input to the CK terminal is turned on within the clear signal release time. If the external WDT clear signal is not released as it is, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  Since the RST0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the RESETN terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b are negative logic inputs, the voltage input to the Vcc terminal is smaller than the threshold value or input to the CK terminal. When the external WDT clear signal is not released while the external WDT clear signal is ON within the clear signal release time, the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b are reset. A capacitor PC8 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the Vs terminal of the external WDT 4120c, and a capacitor PC9 grounded to the ground is electrically connected to the Vcc terminal. + 5.2V input to the Vcc terminal by the capacitor PC9 is smoothed by removing ripples. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the external WDT 4120c, is grounded with the grant, and the positive logic RESET terminal of the external WDT 4120c is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 108, + 5.2V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the grounded capacitor PC10, and + 5.2V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5.2V is also input to the OE terminal which is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, when +5.2 V is input to its OE terminal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the CLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b are input.

[9-3-3. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a drive PIC1. This drive PIC1 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, when a discharge motor drive signal is input to the base terminal and the emitter terminal is grounded, an excitation signal is output from the corresponding collector terminal. A drive pulse is output.

  As shown in FIG. 108, + 24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 through the Zener diode PZD0. The anode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to + 24V, and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1. + 24V input to the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 serves as a drive power source for the payout motor 744. The base terminal of the drive PIC1 is electrically connected to the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and corresponds to the payout motor drive signal output from the output pins PC0 to PC3. A drive pulse as an excitation signal from the collector terminal is connected to each of the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A of the payout motor 744 via the resistors PR3 to PR6 and the prize ball case inner substrate 754 shown in FIG. Phase). These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 744, and rotate the dispensing motor 744. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When the counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive PIC1, the drive PIC1 is damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the cathode terminal of the drive PIC1 and the cathode terminal of the Zener diode PZD0 are electrically connected.

[9-3-4. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120e is a circuit to which detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, the error release switch 860a, and the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 are input. First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input will be described. Subsequently, a circuit to which a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 is input, and a circuit to which a detection signal from the error release switch 860a is input. A circuit to which a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b is input will be described.

[9-3-4 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conductive) in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is connected to the main body frame 3. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. 109, as shown in FIG. 109, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is applied to one end of the door frame opening switch 618 via the payout control board 4110. The resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31 are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30. Between the connection of the resistor PR30 and the resistor PR31, a resistor PR32 grounded to the ground and an electrolytic capacitor PC30 grounded to the ground are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR33 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR30 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR34 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR31 via the resistor PR35. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 via the resistor PR36.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR35, the base terminal of the transistor PTR31 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR37 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR31 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR38 and input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Are electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR31 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a door opening signal.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to a resistor PR39 grounded to the ground in addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR36. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR32 is grounded to ground, the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97, and the transistor PTR32 is open with the emitter terminal grounded to ground. It is configured as a collector output type. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to the + 12V side by this pull-up resistor. When the transistor PTR32 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR30 and PR32 and the electrolytic capacitor PC30 has a door frame opening switch 618 when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3. Is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the circuit repeat ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR33 and the transistor PTR30 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR35 and PR37 and the transistor PTR31 is This is a final stage switch circuit that outputs a door opening signal to the payout control I / O port 4120b by being turned on / off by an ON / OFF signal from the first stage switch circuit, and comprises resistors PR36 and PR39 and a transistor PTR32. This circuit is a final-stage switch circuit that outputs a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by being turned ON / OFF by an ON / OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON. Therefore, the + 12V supplied through the door frame opening switch 618 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit and the first stage is absorbed. When applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR30 constituting the switch circuit, the transistor PTR30 is turned ON, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned ON. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled down to the ground side, so the voltages applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 constituting the final-stage switch circuit are also brought to the ground side. By being pulled down, the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 are turned OFF, and the final stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR38, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that + 12V is blocked by the door frame opening switch 618 and the base of the transistor PTR30 constituting the first-stage switch circuit. When the voltage applied to the terminal is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR30 is turned off, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned off. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR30 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR34, so this voltage is the base terminal of the transistors PTR31 and PTR32 constituting the final-stage switch circuit. Is applied to the transistors PTR31 and PTR32, and the switch circuit in the final stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR31 is pulled down to the ground side and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 is output. The frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is reduced to the main control board 4100 by reducing the voltage applied to the main control board 4100.

  Thus, in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the first-stage switch circuit is turned on, and the last-stage switch circuit is turned off. A door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame opening information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100, while the door frame 5 is When closed by the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the first-stage switch circuit is turned off and the last-stage switch circuit is both turned on, and the door frame whose logic is LOW. An opening signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

[9-3-4 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conductive) in a state where the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, so that the body frame 3 is connected to the outer frame 2. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in the closed state. 109, as shown in FIG. 109, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is applied to one end of the main body frame opening switch 619 via the payout control board 4110. The resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41 are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33. Between the connection of the resistor PR40 and the resistor PR41, a resistor PR42 grounded to the ground and an electrolytic capacitor PC31 grounded to the ground are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR43 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR33 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR44 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR34 via the resistor PR45. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 via the resistor PR46.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR34 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR47 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR34 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Are electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR34 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 changes, and the signal is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a main body frame opening signal.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the resistor PR46, in addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR46. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR35 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32 and also electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The transistor PTR35 is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), and is pulled up to the + 12V side by this pull-up resistor. When the transistor PTR35 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a frame opening information output signal. This frame opening information output signal is output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 as well as from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32, and is output by the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR32. An OR circuit is configured.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR40 and PR42 and the electrolytic capacitor PC31 has a main body frame opening switch 619 when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. Is a chattering prevention circuit for absorbing fluctuations in the voltage from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to the fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the circuit repeat ON / OFF for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR43 and the transistor PTR33 is a first-stage switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR47 and the transistor PTR34 is This is a final-stage switch circuit that outputs a main body frame opening signal to the payout control I / O port 4120b by being turned on / off by an ON / OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit. From the resistors PR46 and PR49 and the transistor PTR35, The configured circuit is a final-stage switch circuit that outputs a frame opening information output signal to the main control board 4100 by being turned ON / OFF by an ON / OFF signal from the first-stage switch circuit.

  When the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that + 12V supplied through the main body frame opening switch 619 is absorbed by the chattering prevention circuit and the first stage is absorbed. When applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR33 constituting the switch circuit, the transistor PTR33 is turned ON, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned ON. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled down to the ground side, so the voltages applied to the base terminals of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 constituting the final-stage switch circuit are also brought to the ground side. By being pulled down, the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 are turned off, and the switch circuit at the final stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the body frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor provided on the main control board 4100, and the frame opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the main control board 4100. It becomes.

  On the other hand, in the state where the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so + 12V is blocked by the main body frame opening switch 619 and the base of the transistor PTR33 constituting the first stage switch circuit is formed. When the voltage applied to the terminal is pulled down to the ground side, the transistor PTR33 is turned off, and the first-stage switch circuit is turned off. When the first-stage switch circuit is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR33 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR44, so this voltage is the base terminal of the transistors PTR34 and PTR35 constituting the final-stage switch circuit. Is applied to the transistors PTR34 and PTR35, and the switch circuit at the final stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR34 is pulled down to the ground side and the body frame open signal whose logic is LOW is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR35 The frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is reduced to the main control board 4100 by reducing the voltage applied to the main control board 4100.

  Thus, in a state where the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the first stage switch circuit is turned on and both the last stage switch circuits are turned off. A body frame release signal whose logic is HI is output to an input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame release information output signal whose logic is HI is output to the main control board 4100, while the body frame 3 is In the state of being closed by the outer frame 2, when the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, the first-stage switch circuit is turned OFF and the final-stage switch circuit is turned ON, and the main body frame whose logic is LOW. An opening signal is output to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and a frame opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conductive). Even if the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conductive), the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. It becomes the state. As described above, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, for example, a frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when a short circuit occurs. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 5 can determine the state in which the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 or the state in which the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′, body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected. Is in a state in which the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 even when it is turned off (cut). In this way, even when the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′ are normally open switches, for example, a frame opening information output signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when a disconnection occurs. The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 can determine the state in which the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2.

[9-3-4 (c). Circuit to which detection signal from error release switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 109, pin 1 as the output pin of error release switch 860a is pulled up to + 5.2V by pull-up resistor PR50, and input port PA of payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. The input pin PA0 is electrically connected. The first pin of the error release switch 860a is electrically connected to the second pin, and the third and fourth pins are grounded. Thus, when the error release switch 860a is not operated, the 1st pin and the 2nd pin are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR50, while when the error release switch 860a is operated, the 1st pin And the 2nd pin is pulled down to the ground side by being electrically connected to the 3rd pin and the 4th pin.

  The error release switch 860a is electrically connected to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC32 grounded (the capacitor PC32 It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the error release switch 860a is not operated, an error release detection signal whose logic is HI by being pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR50 is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated, an error release detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA0 of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-4 (d). Circuit where detection signal from ball removal switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 109, the first pin as the output pin of the ball removal switch 860b is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, and the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. The input pin PA1 is electrically connected. The 1st pin of the ball removal switch 860b is electrically connected to the 2nd pin, and the 3rd and 4th pins are grounded. Thus, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, the first pin and the second pin are pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR51, while when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, the first pin And the 2nd pin is pulled down to the ground side by being electrically connected to the 3rd pin and the 4th pin.

  The ball removal switch 860b is electrically connected to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC33 grounded to the ground (the capacitor PC33 is It also plays a role as a low-pass filter). When the ball removal switch 860b is not operated, a ball removal detection signal that is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR51 and has a logic level HI is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated, the ball removal detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin PA1 of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120f for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 99 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and one payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 99 are supplied, while the payout control board 4110 connects the rental device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 110, an input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC60 to PIC64 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 via the resistor PR60. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 60 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC60. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 via the resistor PR61, and also the base of the transistor PTR61 via the resistor PR62. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR61, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 is also electrically connected to a pull-up resistor R63 pulled up to the + 5.2V side.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR61, the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR64 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR60 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR65 and input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. Are electrically connected to a predetermined input pin. When the transistor PTR60 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  On the other hand, in addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR62, the base terminal of the transistor TR61 is also electrically connected to a resistor PR66 that is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR61 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR67 and is electrically connected to a firing timing circuit 4130c described later. When the transistor PTR61 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 changes, and the signal is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR61 and PR64 and the transistor PTR60 is a switch circuit. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off and pulled. The voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60, whereby the transistor PTR60 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled to the ground side and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR60 is lowered to the ground side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 60 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PTR65, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is applied to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Entered.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 is also a switch circuit. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned off and pulled. When the voltage pulled up by the up resistor PR63 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61, the transistor PTR61 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled down to the ground side and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60, the photocoupler PIC60 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR61 is lowered to the ground side, whereby the transistor The PTR 61 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PTR67, and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the firing timing circuit 4130c. This switch circuit constitutes a part of an input circuit of a launch control input circuit 4130a described later.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 via the resistor PR68. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61. The resistor PR68 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC61. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC61 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR69, and the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b are set in advance. It is electrically connected to the specified input pin. When the photocoupler PIC61 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC61 is pulled down to the ground side is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC61 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose logic is HI by the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC61 being pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR69 is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 61 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 via the resistor PR70 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC61. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62. The resistor PR70 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC62. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 62 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 62 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR71, and the input port PA, PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b It is electrically connected to the specified input pin. When the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned on, The BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 62 is pulled down to the ground side is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC62 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC62 is pulled up to + 5.2V by the pull-up resistor PR71, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input pin of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 62 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  The EXS signal output from the output pin PB0 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. 108 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR72. + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73. The resistor PR73 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC63. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned ON. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 is It is designed to turn off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60. And is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC63 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC63 is turned ON. Therefore, the EXS whose logic is LOW because the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 63 is pulled down to the ground side is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 via the resistor PR73 and the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC63 is Since the voltage is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 by the pull-up resistor PR74, the EXS whose logic is HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 in order to turn it off. In this way, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC63 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b.

  The PRDY signal output from the output pin PB1 of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b shown in FIG. 108 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR75. +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76. The resistor PR76 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC64. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 is turned ON. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR76 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 is It is designed to turn off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 together with the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC60 and the emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC63, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is played by the pull-up resistor PR77. A ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL in the CR unit 6 and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC64 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6.

  When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is LOW, the photocoupler PIC64 is turned ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is pulled down to the ground side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 via the resistor PR77 and the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b is HI, the photocoupler PIC64 is In order to turn OFF, PRDY whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR77 and the logic becomes HI is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC64 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal from the payout control I / O port 4120b.

[9-3-6. Various input / output signals of payout control I / O port]
Next, various input / output signals of the payout control I / O port 4120b will be described. The data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control I / O port 4120b exchange various information and various signals with the data input / output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control MPU 4120a via the data bus.

  As shown in FIG. 108, serial data from the main control board 4100 is input to the RXD terminal which is a serial data input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b as a main payout serial data reception signal. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 4100 from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b is output as a payer serial data transmission signal.

  An error release detection signal from the error release switch 860a is input to the input pin PA0 to each input pin of the input port PA of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and the ball removal from the ball removal switch 860b is input to the input pin PA1. A detection signal is input, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 is transmitted to the input pin PA2 to notify the completion of normal reception of the payment serial data reception signal, and the input pin PA3 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. Power failure notice signal 1 is input. In addition, a predetermined input pin of the input ports PA and PE of the payout control I / O port 4120b has a BRQ signal as a payout operation start request signal from the CR unit 6 and a rental request from the CR unit 6. Various signals from the CR unit 6 such as a BRDY signal that is a signal, a CR connection signal 1 indicating whether or not the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected, and a door from the door frame opening switch 618 In addition to the frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal from the main body frame opening switch 619, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is input.

  On the other hand, each output pin of the output port PB of the payout control I / O port 4120b outputs an EXS signal from the output pin PB0 indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and from the output pin PB1. A PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a ball is possible or impossible is output, and the latch state of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is released from the output pin PB2. Is output from the output pin PB3, and the payer ACK signal is transmitted from the output pin PB4 to the external WDT 4120c. The external WDT clear signal is output from the output pin PB4 to the external WDT 4120c. Has been. Also, a payout motor drive signal is output from the output pins PC0 to PC3 of the output port PC of the payout control I / O port 4120b, and an error LED is displayed from each output pin of the output port PD of the payout control I / O port 4120b. The drive signal of the device 860c is output.

[9-4. Circuit of launch control unit]
Next, the firing control unit 4130 will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, the firing control unit 4130 includes a firing control input circuit 4130a, an oscillation circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. Here, the firing control input circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 111, and a detailed description of the configuration of the firing timing circuit 4130c and the like will be described later.

[9-4-1. Launch control input circuit]
As shown in FIG. 111, the launch control input circuit 4130a of the payout control board 4110 receives a detection signal from the touch switch 516 of the handle device 500 and a detection signal from the launch stop switch 518 of the handle device 500. This is input via the board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The touch switch 516 detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 47, and the firing stop switch 518 is a single button of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. It is detected whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will by operating 520. First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the touch switch 516 is input will be described, and then a circuit to which a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 will be input.

[9-4-1a. Circuit to which detection signal from touch switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 111, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is applied to one end of the touch switch 516 via the resistor PR80 of the payout control board 4110, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the touch switch 516 is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the payout control board 4110, and the resistance PR81 is set. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR81, the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is electrically connected to a resistor PR82 grounded to the ground and a capacitor PC80 grounded to the ground. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor C80. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR80 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR83 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. When the transistor PTR80 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 changes, and the signal is input as a touch detection signal to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR81 and PR82 and the transistor PTR80 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the touch switch 516. When the voltage pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor provided at 192 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80, the transistor PTR80 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled down to the ground side, and the touch detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled down to the ground side, turning off the transistor PTR80 and turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR80 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the touch detection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

[9-4-1b. Circuit to which detection signal from launch stop switch is input]
As shown in FIG. 111, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 103 is supplied to one end of the firing stop switch 518 via the resistor PR84, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the handle relay board 192. The other end of the firing stop switch 518 is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor (not shown) provided on the handle relay board 192, and is input to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the payout control board 4110. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 via PR85. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR85, the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is electrically connected to a resistor PR86 grounded to the ground and a capacitor PC81 grounded to the ground. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor C81. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR81 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to the + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR87 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. When the transistor PTR81 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR85 and PR86 and the transistor PTR81 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, and is provided on the handle relay board 192 when the single button 520 is not operated. When the voltage pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81, the transistor PTR81 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled down to the ground side, and the firing stop detection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c. On the other hand, when the single button 520 is operated, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled down to the ground side, turning off the transistor PTR81 and turning off the switch circuit. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR81 is pulled up to + 5.2V side by the pull-up resistor PR87, and the firing stop detection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the firing timing circuit 4130c.

  Note that the switch circuit including the resistors PR62 and PR66 and the transistor PTR61 shown in FIG. 110 is also a part of the input circuit of the firing control input circuit 4130a, and the CR connection signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR61. Is also input to the firing timing circuit 4130c in addition to the touch detection signal and the firing stop signal described above.

[9-5. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[9-5-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the payout control board 4110 sends a payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, power failure warning signal, frame opening information output information, etc. to the main control board 4100. Output. On the other hand, the payout control board 4110 has a main hit serial data reception signal, a main payout ACK signal, a RAM clear signal, a big hit information output signal such as a 15 round big hit information output signal, a two round big hit information output signal, and a probability variation. Game information signals relating to games such as a medium information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time medium information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal are input from the main control board 4100.

[9-5-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), in addition to the door frame opening signal and the main body frame opening signal, a prize ball indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. Number information output signal, through the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, in addition to jackpot information output signals such as 15 round jackpot information output signal and 2 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special A game information signal such as a symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time medium information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784.

  The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and monitors the game of the player. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits and the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a player determines whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people choose. However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of big hits will occur. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can generate the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit of two rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of big hits for rounds and the number of occurrences of big hits for two rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of big hits for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of big hit gaming status, Nor.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[10. Driving solenoid drive method]
Next, a method for driving the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116. FIG. 113 is a block diagram showing a driving circuit for a firing solenoid, FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 115 is a diagram showing characteristics of the DC / DC converter. 116 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, output voltage, signal logic and waveform, etc. at predetermined points of the drive circuit will be described.

[10-1. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 113, the driving system of the firing solenoid 654 mainly includes a firing control input circuit 4130a, a transmission circuit 4130b, a firing timing circuit 4130c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d, and a ball of the firing control unit 4130 in the payout control board 4110. The power supply solenoid drive circuit 4130e, the DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831, the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and the smoothing circuit 851c are configured.

  As described above, when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, the launch control input circuit 4130a is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the CR control unit 4110a. A touch switch 516 that detects whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body is output as a CR connection signal to the firing timing circuit 4130c by inputting a signal indicating that power (AC24V) is being supplied. When a detection signal from the player is input, it is output as a touch detection signal to the launch timing circuit 4130c and detected from the launch stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. When the signal is input, it is output to the firing timing circuit 4130c as a firing stop detection signal.

  The launch timing circuit 4130c permits or prohibits the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4130a. Specifically, the launch timing circuit 4130c says that the CR unit 6 is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The first case, the second case that the touch detection signal tells the front 506 of the rotating handle body that no palm or finger is touching, the launch stop detection signal forcibly stops the launch of the game ball When any one of the third cases of transmission is applicable, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited, while when not all of the cases, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted.

  The firing timing circuit 4130c receives the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4130b. When permitting the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654, 100 game balls per minute are shown in FIG. The firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward the game area 1100 shown in FIG. 5 and is output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d. Is output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4130e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 by a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4130e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 by + 24V from the power supply board 851.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4130da, an amplifier circuit 4130db, a voltage comparison circuit 4130dc, and a switching circuit 4130dd. The shunt regulator circuit 4130da is supplied with + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851, and is stabilized from this + 5.2V DC + 2.5V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter " + 2.5V ”) and is supplied to the amplifier circuit 4130db.

  As shown in FIG. 114A, the shunt regulator circuit 4130da mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is held at a constant voltage with respect to the load. + 5.2V is applied to the REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, via the resistor PR90, and is input to the REF terminal by the resistor PR90. The current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5 V to the amplifier circuit 4130db. This +2.5 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC90 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC90 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Returning to FIG. 113, the amplifier circuit 4130db amplifies +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da by a factor of 2, and creates DC + 5.0V (DC + 5.0V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.0V”). Then, the power is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the handle relay board 192.

  As shown in FIG. 114A, the amplifier circuit 4130db mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC91. The operational amplifier PIC91 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and + 2.5V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 of the shunt regulator circuit 4130da is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91, and the operational amplifier PIC91. And the other end of the resistor PR92 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91. And are electrically connected. The resistance values of the resistors PR91 and PR92 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC91 is doubled. As described above, the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is + 5.0V obtained by doubling + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC91, as described above, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the handle. The electric power is supplied to the potentiometer 512 in the handle device 500 via the relay board 192. This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC91 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC91 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC91 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC92 connected to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the potentiometer 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, and includes a first fixed terminal, a second fixed terminal, and a variable terminal. The first fixed terminal is +5.0 V from the above-described amplifier circuit 4130db. , And the second fixed terminal is electrically connected to the resistor PR100 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR100 is grounded. When the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512 also rotates, and the voltage applied to the first fixed terminal and the second fixed terminal is changed to the front of the rotary handle main body 506. Is divided according to the rotational operation of the potentiometer 512, that is, according to the rotational position of the detection shaft portion 512a of the potentiometer 512, and the divided voltage can be taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is supplied to resistors PR93 and PR94 (FIG. 114B) described later in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d of the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The voltage that is divided by the divided resistor PR94 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage.

  As described above, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 is grounded to the ground via the handle relay board 192 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 as shown in FIG. The capacitor PC93 removes the ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) and smoothes it (the capacitor PC93 also serves as a low-pass filter). Applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC92 at the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of volts, and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC92. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first stage operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first stage operational amplifier PIC92. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage outputs the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92 by a factor of 1, that is, as it is as a voltage on the order of volts. The first-stage operational amplifier PIC92 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts, but outputs the voltage to the first-stage input-side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC93. Therefore, circuit separation from the first stage output side circuit is realized. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first stage input side circuit to the first stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the first stage input side circuit. Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC94 connected to the ground.

  The output terminal of the first operational amplifier PIC92 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR93 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (−terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR93 is the non-inverting input terminal ( + Terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR94 whose one end is grounded, in addition to the other end of the resistor PR93. As a result, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC92 in the first stage is a voltage in the order of volts because the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts, is simply output as described above, and is divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94. The voltage of the divided resistor PR94 is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage as a voltage in the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage doubles the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC92, that is, a voltage in the order of millivolts is output as a firing intensity target voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. To do. The operational amplifier PIC93 at the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage of the resistance PR94 in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR93 and PR94, as it is, but the resistance in the millivolt order divided by the resistances PR93 and PR94. Circuit separation is realized between a rear-stage input side circuit for applying a voltage that the PR94 takes over and a rear-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear stage input side circuit to the rear stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the rear stage input side circuit. Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC93 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC95 connected to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 113, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 flows through the resistor PR101 having one end connected to the ground, so that the voltage in the millivolt order that the resistor PR101 takes is used as a firing control voltage. Applied to 4130 dc. The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is also applied with the firing intensity target voltage which is a voltage in the order of millivolts described above. As described above, the firing control voltage and the firing strength target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc are resistance from the voltage in the order of volts to the voltage in the order of millivolts in the payout control board 4110 (the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d). The voltage is stepped down by the voltage that is handled by PR101 and PR94. That is, since the wiring pattern is applied via the wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, the wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc has a firing control voltage and a firing strength target voltage at a voltage in the millivolt order. Can be compared with each other, between the board device of the payout control board 4110 and the hitting ball launcher 650 and between the board equipment of the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500 via wiring (harness). Therefore, the wiring (harness) is easily affected by noise, and the influence of noise between the substrate devices is suppressed by using a voltage in the order of volts.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc is an inverting circuit that compares the firing control voltage with the firing strength target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4130 dd. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the launch control voltage is larger than the launch intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as “L”), while the launch control voltage. Is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as “H”). Thus, since the output logic is H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4130 dd as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4130dd receives the current from the DC / DC converter 831a included in the firing power supply board 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc every time the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input, A combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC <b> 0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc is input to the switching circuit 4130 dd, the switching circuit 4130 dd generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831 a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC 0. On the other hand, when an OFF signal is input from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is cut off while flowing through the firing solenoid 654. That is, the switching circuit 4130 dd receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc and supplies the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831 a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC 0 to the firing solenoid 654. When the voltage that is divided by the resistor PR101 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes L and OFF. The signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd, and the switching circuit 4130dd blocks the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. Due to this interruption, the current does not flow to the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing strength target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc becomes H again, and the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4130dd. As described above, 4130dd passes the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. As described above, in accordance with the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc, the switching circuit 4130 dd generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831 a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC 0 into the firing solenoid 654. Therefore, the switching circuit 4130 dd controls the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc to self-oscillate to flow the current to the firing solenoid. That is, the switching circuit 4130dd functions as a “self-excited oscillation constant current circuit”, and brings the firing control voltage close to the firing intensity target voltage. Thereby, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, and the launch solenoid 654 can be driven with a launch intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  When the player touches the front of the rotary handle body 506 and is at the original rotational position where the front of the rotary handle body 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512 is the second fixed value of the potentiometer 512. The voltage is applied to the resistor PR100 applied to the terminal. That is, the voltage that the resistor PR100 is responsible for is applied to the second fixed terminal of the potentiometer 512 as an offset voltage. This offset voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4130 dc is output to the switching circuit 4130 dd, the switching circuit 4130 dd combines the current from the DC / DC converter 831 a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC 0. The merged current is passed through firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. At this time, the firing strength of the firing solenoid 654 is at least over the firing rail 660 shown in FIG. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is the firing intensity target voltage, the current commensurate with the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined). 1) flows to the firing solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the firing solenoid 654 can jump over the firing rail 660 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. 1. Since the game area 1100 cannot be reached, it is received and collected as a foul ball at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR100 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc as the firing intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all the game balls that have been launched are collected as foul balls. Thereby, since it can prevent overlapping with the game ball sent to the firing rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, the firing solenoid 654 is prevented from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. In addition, it is possible to prevent the firing solenoid 654 from being overloaded and to prevent failure.

  In addition, as described above, the offset voltage is set to a voltage for obtaining a minimum firing intensity that matches the original rotational position when the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body is at the original rotational position. The game balls launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 along the firing rail 660 and the outer rail 1111 are received and collected at the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 located as a foul ball at the lower part of the foul space 626. It has become so. As a result, when the player starts to rotate the front of the rotary handle body 506, even if the player cannot rotate the front of the rotary handle body 506 to increase the firing strength, all the game balls Can jump over the firing rail 660, so that it is possible to avoid the game balls from colliding with each other on the firing rail 660. Therefore, before the next game ball is launched by the launch solenoid 654, the player rotates the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to increase the launch strength, so that the game ball launched this time with the launch strength is removed from the outer rail. It is possible to cause the game ball launched this time together with the previously launched game ball to jump out to the game area 1100 by colliding with the previously launched game ball descending along 1111, and temporarily enter the game area 1100. Even if it cannot be ejected, it is received and collected at the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, which is located at the lower part of the foul space 626 as a foul ball. In other words, even if the player cannot rotate the rotary handle main body 506 to increase the firing strength, the launching ball is given a launch strength enough to jump over the launch rail 660. Do not collide on the firing rail 660 to cause clogging. Also, when the player operates the front 506 of the rotary handle to increase the firing strength, the game ball launched this time with the launch strength is lowered along the outer rail 1111 to the previously launched game ball. The foul ball of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the bottom of the foul space 626 as a foul ball even if the game ball launched this time together with the previously launched game ball cannot be caused to jump into the game area 1100 by colliding. Since all are received and collected at the entrance 542e, the player can rotate the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to further increase the firing strength, thereby allowing the game ball to jump out to the game area 1100 without causing a ball clogging. . In other words, the game ball launched this time is collided with the previously launched game ball descending along the outer inner rail 1111, and the game ball launched this time is jumped to the game area 1100 together with the previously launched game ball. Even if the player may not be able to play the game, it may cause the player to feel uncomfortable, and the player can play the game ball without causing clogging by rotating the rotary handle main body 506 to further increase the firing strength. Since it can be made to jump out to the area | region 1100, the discomfort can be eliminated. Therefore, the player's discomfort due to the ball clogging at the start of the rotation operation of the front 506 of the rotary handle body can be eliminated.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 in the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4130dc is + 2.5V which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4130da. Is amplified by the amplifier circuit 4130db and is divided by the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, so that the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body is also maintained at the same rotational position. When this is done, no fluctuation occurs and the voltage is held constant. As a result, the switching circuit 4130dd causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by flowing the merged current to the launch solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launcher 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654 can be prevented.

  In addition, the pachinko island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a game ball circulation system in which game balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are ground and supplied to the pachinko gaming machine again. For this reason, in addition to heat due to polishing of game balls, heat due to collision and friction between game balls, the temperature in the pachinko island facility is extremely high due to heat from the power board of the pachinko machine and various illuminations, etc. . In this embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC90 for the shunt regulator circuit 4130da, + 2.5V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko facility. It can be output. As a result, the fluctuation of +2.5 V due to the temperature is suppressed, so that the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the potentiometer 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4130dc can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4130dd. In other words, when the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle is the same rotational position, “unevenness” can be suppressed in the firing strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100, so that “unevenness” of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[10-2. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 115 with respect to the input current at the point TA and the output current and output voltage at the point TB shown in FIG. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

  First, as shown in FIG. 115A, the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In section C in which the current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout increases from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases from 400 mA to 660 mA by approximately 260 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from 1 to +5 V, the output current Iout increases from 660 mA to 1010 mA by about 350 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the vicinity of +5 V to zero V, the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA.

  The relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is as shown in FIG. It has become a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, when a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, when the current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin begins to become smaller than the output current Iout, The game ball launched toward the area 1100 has a launch intensity that reaches the game area 1100. In section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA by about 40 mA, while the input current Iin decreases from 320 mA to 260 mA by about 60 mA, compared with the output current Iout. Thus, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C where the output voltage Vout is from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout is increased by approximately 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by approximately 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA. The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In section D where the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout is increased by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by about 35 mA from 210 mA to 175 mA. Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by combining 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotary handle body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotating handle main body front 506 is not rotated is touched 506, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. In some cases, the combined current of 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the front of the rotary handle body 506 and rotates the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise. Thus, the current flows through the firing solenoid 654 when it is at the limit rotational position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is that the game ball that has already jumped to the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the stop 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering the various winning ports. For this reason, the range of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a that can be taken when the player turns the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise to play a game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <value of output current Iout <1000 mA), which is a milliampere order current.

[10-3. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit]
Next, at a constant rotational position in front of the rotary handle body 506, the output current Iout and output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 113, and the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c, Will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TC point is a firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4130c. This is a point for referring to T0.

  As described above, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c permits the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654, 100 game balls per minute, that is, 60000 ms, are directed toward the game area 1100. Since it is set so as to be ejected, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), its pulse width is 30 ms, and its period T is 600 ms.

  Here, when the player touches the rotary handle body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle body front 506 to reach the limit rotational position, the DC / DC when the player is at the original rotational position not rotated. A waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

  If the firing reference circuit T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is in the limit rotational position, the state shown in FIGS. As described above, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts to flow to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to +5 V in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA which is the maximum output current described above. Then, when the input is stopped after 30 ms has elapsed after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). When the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as shown in FIG. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is close to zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is equal to the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. When charging starts with a certain current of 1010 mA and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to near +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  On the other hand, when the firing handle front pulse 506 from the firing timing circuit 4130c is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4130d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is in the original rotational position, FIG. As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-mentioned minimum current, and the discharge solenoid 654 The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the minimum output current described above. Then, after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, when 30 ms elapses and the input is stopped, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). When the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as described above. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 slightly falls, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 outputs the output of the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a current of 360 mA that is the current Iout, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  As described above, even when the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input. Can be completed within the remaining 570 ms charging time until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, consider a case where the DC / DC converter 831a adopts a control method in which a current flows through the firing solenoid 654 alone in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within a period of 30 ms after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. In this control method, since the current that the DC / DC converter 831a independently flows to the firing solenoid 654 is about 2 A to 3.5 A, this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven, a large current larger than 2 A to 3.5 A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the firing reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated with a period T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases with this period T. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic components, decorations used for decoration, etc. in addition to the instantaneous large current that flows when the firing solenoid 654 is driven. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 without the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The amperage-order current supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37 V on the power supply board 851 is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is inputted until the next firing reference pulse T0 is inputted. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the “first current” in the order of milliamperes supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851. And electrolytic When the power supply SC0 is charged with the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is distributed to the “second current” in the milliampere order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851. it can. As a result, the amperage order of the amperage order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The current is supplied from the DC power source of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a during a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. It can be averaged by the “first current” and “second current” in the order of milliamperes supplied. Therefore, a load for supplying an instantaneous large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. Further, it is possible to eliminate the time spent on designing the operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[10-4. Relationship between firing reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 and the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4130c will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4130c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 113 refers to the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4130c. It is a point to do.

  The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5) which is five times 30 ms which is the firing reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4130dd of the firing solenoid driving circuit 4130d, the ball feeding reference pulse T1 is driven by the ball feeding solenoid drive of the firing solenoid driving circuit 4130d as shown in FIGS. Input to the circuit 4130e (when timing t0, 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thereby, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. Thus, the next set of game balls to be launched can be completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. Each time the firing reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. It can be launched continuously toward.

[11. Sub LCD drive circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 shown in FIG. 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the sub liquid crystal driving substrate. FIG. 118A shows the relationship (characteristic curve) between the operation amount (resistance value) of the luminance adjustment volume and the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device. 118 (b) is a schematic diagram showing luminance adjustment of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device, FIG. 118 (c) is a schematic diagram showing variation in luminance adjustment, and FIG. 118 (d). FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating a range of a rotation angle of a luminance adjustment volume with respect to a luminance variation range of a backlight of a sub liquid crystal display device when newly used and reused. First, reception of a serial signal and the like will be described, and subsequently, a backlight power supply circuit of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, backlight luminance adjustment work, and variations in luminance adjustment will be described. In FIG. 117, the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 shown in FIG. 102 for relaying between the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 is omitted.

[11-1. Serial signal reception]
In addition to the + 3.3V creation circuit 3425a and the backlight power supply circuit 3425b shown in FIG. 104, the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 mainly includes a sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 as shown in FIG.

  The sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 receives a serial signal (serial data) by the differential method “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a of the liquid crystal output board 3420 shown in FIG. When transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal through the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, they are respectively input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 separates noise from the plus signal and the minus signal, respectively. Be able to. The plus signal and minus signal from which the noise has been separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator), which prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  The sub-LCD receiver ICSDIC0 performs horizontal synchronization with three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is restored to three synchronizing signals, ie, a signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8 bits each of the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, and are therefore the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 is for the liquid crystal output board built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 as described above, in addition to the signal from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a of the liquid crystal output board 3420. The LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the serial I / O port, is also input to the differential circuit 3420d of the liquid crystal output board 3420, which is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. It has become. As described above, the forced switching circuit 3420c of the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 transmits these two signals when the differential circuit 3420d receives two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 3420d, a signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is transmitted. The circuit is configured to be connected to the circuit. Thus, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differencing circuit 3420d, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 3420d while being transmitted to the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, In order to make a circuit connection so as to transmit a signal output from the liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, a signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 via the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422.

  The forcible switching circuit 3420c is a signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, that is, the sub liquid crystal transmitter when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 3420d. A serial signal (serial data) by the differential method “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. Are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 3420d receives two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. When you are, the two signals via the sub LCD relay substrate 3422, is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and are input to the RXIN + terminal and RXIN- terminal sub LCD receiver ICSDIC0. The sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a request to output the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are inputted in the differencing circuit 3420d, and will be described later. The LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422 and the liquid crystal output board 3420.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output board incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140, is a pachinko game. For the sub-liquid crystal provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 during the period when the startup screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 at the time of power-on of the machine 1 or during the period when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is on standby In order to check whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the sub liquid crystal display device Sent as a 3450 operation confirmation request It is intended. The LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 3420d, but is a signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. The differential format serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” has a completely different structure. For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. The LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is forcibly output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, using the function of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from that of the signal output from the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, the liquid crystal incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140. By outputting from the output board serial I / O port, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the sub liquid crystal receiver IC ICDIC0 is operating normally. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD terminal, the VDDO terminal, the LVDSVDD terminal, the PLLVDD terminal, and the PDWN terminal of the receiver ICSDIC0 for the sub liquid crystal are supplied with + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creating circuit 3425a, respectively. The terminal, the LVDSGND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminal are grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that is the ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as a ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal serving as a ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal serving as the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PDWN terminal tells that the logic is HI when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), and that the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power down. It is a terminal to convey. The PDWN terminal is supplied with + 3.3V through the resistor SDR1, and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal is used to transmit various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (The logic transitions from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal instructs whether or not output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later is permitted. As described above, the output is always possible by grounding the OE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to the ground. The operation modes include a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. In this mode, the sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 restores a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal) including a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is confirmed (recovered). In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, The sub-liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronizing signals (three-bit synchronizing signal) of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal is abnormal data for some reason. When it is difficult to draw on the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is sent to the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistance (a resistance for reducing reflection noise) of the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422, and the liquid crystal output board 3420. Is input to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is connected to the INIT terminal of the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a to notify the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a of the liquid crystal output board 3420 when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. A confirmation signal is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is connected between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425. That is, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. The INIT terminal of the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 may be electrically connected directly.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This terminal outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistance of the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422, and the liquid crystal output board 3420. Input to the MPU 4150a.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. Terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that reports that a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via the resistor SDR3 that is a damping resistor (a resistor that reduces reflection noise).

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via the resistor SDR4 that is a damping resistor (a resistor that reduces reflection noise).

  The D0 to D17 terminals are provided with three video signals (18, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and RXIN- terminal, respectively. This is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal. Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor (reflection). The noise is input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 via a ladder resistor SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is connected to a damping resistor (reflection Input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 through a ladder resistor SDRA1 which is a resistor for reducing noise). The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor (reflection). Input to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 through a ladder resistor SDRA2 which is a resistor for reducing noise).

  Note that the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal output board 3420, the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422, the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. Further, + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 3425a is supplied to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

[11-2. Sub LCD power supply circuit]
Next, a backlight power supply circuit of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 will be described. As shown in FIG. 117, the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 supplies the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (in this embodiment, the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 uses a white LED). A backlight power supply circuit 3425b for generating power to be generated is provided. The backlight power supply circuit 3425b mainly includes an LED current adjustment circuit 3425f that is optimally designed for constant current lighting of a white LED.

  + 3.3V is supplied to the power supply terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f, and the GND terminal is grounded. A capacitor SDC4 is electrically connected between the power supply terminal and the GND terminal, and high frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line supplied to the power supply terminal.

  The SW terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f is supplied with + 3.3V via the coil SDL1, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode SDD0. The cathode terminal of the diode SDD0 is electrically connected to the OVD terminal of the LED current adjusting circuit 3425f, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor SDC5 whose one end is grounded.

  The SW terminal is a terminal that is switched by an Nch MOSFET (not shown) built in the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f. When the switch is turned on by this switching, energy is stored in the coil SDL1, while when the switch is turned off, the energy stored in the coil SDL1 is released through the diode SDD0.

  The OVD terminal is a terminal for monitoring whether or not the voltage stored in the coil SDL1 is overvoltage when the energy stored in the coil SDL1 is released through the diode SDD0. When an overvoltage is detected, switching by an Nch MOSFET (not shown) built in the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f described above is stopped. Note that switching is resumed when the applied voltage falls below the detection level.

  In the present embodiment, eight white LEDs are electrically connected in series as the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, and are generated by the switching operation described above at the anode terminal of the first-stage (first) white LED. Is supplied as the LED anode, and is input from the cathode terminal of the white LED in the final stage (eighth) to the FB terminal of the LED current adjusting circuit 3425f as the LED cathode. The If adjustment terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f is electrically connected to a luminance adjustment circuit 3425g for adjusting the current If flowing through the first-stage (first) white LED to the final-stage (eighth) white LED. . The luminance adjustment circuit 3425g is composed of resistors SDR5 and SDR6 that are fixed resistors and a luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 that is a semi-fixed variable resistor. One end of the resistor SDR6 and one fixed end of the two fixed ends of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 are grounded, while the other end of the resistor SDR6 and the remaining one fixed end (ground and ground) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. Are electrically connected to both ends of the resistor SDR6 and the two fixed ends of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, and one end of the resistor SDR5 is connected to the other end of the resistor SDR6. The other end of the resistor SDR5 is electrically connected to the variable end of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0, while the other end of the resistor SDR5 is electrically connected to the other fixed end (the fixed end not grounded to the ground). Has been. One end of SDR5, the other end of resistor SDR6, and the remaining one fixed end (fixed end not grounded) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 are electrically connected to the If adjustment terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f. .

  As described above, the luminance adjustment circuit 3425g includes the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 that are fixed resistors and the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 that is a semi-fixed variable resistor, and the combined resistor RSENS is the minimum resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0. As the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated from the maximum to the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the amount of change in the combined resistance RSENS relative to the operation amount of the rotation operation becomes a linear characteristic. Instead, it has a characteristic of changing in a curved line in which the change amount of the combined resistance RSENS with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation becomes small. The LED current adjustment circuit 3425f adjusts the current If flowing from the first-stage (first) white LED to the last-stage (eighth) white LED so as to match this characteristic. That is, the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f changes the current If flowing through the first-stage (first) white LED to the last-stage (eighth) white LED from the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 to the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. As the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is turned toward, the amount of change in the current If flowing through the first-stage (first) white LED to the last-stage (eighth) white LED with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation becomes smaller. Change to a curved line.

  In the present embodiment, when the current flowing through the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to about 15 mA to 25 mA so as not to exceed the maximum rated current (30 mA (milliampere)) of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the current is fixed. The combined resistance RSENS composed of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 that are resistors and the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 that is a semi-fixed variable resistor is about 12Ω to 20Ω. The resistance value SDR5, which is a fixed resistor, is selected as a general-purpose product that is easily available and inexpensive 24Ω, and the resistor value SDR6, which is a fixed resistor, is selected as a general-purpose product that is easily available and inexpensive 27Ω, And, 100Ω of chip type cermet film ceramic semi-fixed variable resistor VG039N made by Hokuriku Electric Co., Ltd., which is a general-purpose product and easy to obtain, is selected as the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 which is a semi-fixed variable resistor, and the rotation angle is 0 The resistance value can be adjusted from 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value, to 100Ω, which is the maximum resistance value. Can be changed by 37Ω. The relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 and the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the luminance adjustment operation of the backlight, which will be described later, is a solid line in FIG. When the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is 0Ω (zero Ω) which is the minimum resistance value, the backlight brightness of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is the maximum of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. The resistance values of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6, which are the above-described fixed resistors, are selected to be about 45% with respect to the rated luminance, and the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the maximum resistance value of 100Ω. Also, the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 85%.

  The relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 and the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the luminance adjustment operation of the backlight is a solid curve in FIG. 118 (a). When the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is operated, the relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the amount of change in the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (that is, the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 The slope of the solid line curve in FIG. 118 (a) with respect to the manipulated value (resistance value) is a curve that decreases smoothly toward a value of zero. As shown by the two-dot chain line curve in FIG. 118A, when the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated, the inclination of the characteristic curve of the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. However, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 decreases by about 0.37% with respect to the rotation operation at a rotation angle of 27 ° in the section of 0Ω (zero Ω) to 10Ω, and the rotation angle in the section of resistance value 10Ω to 20Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. The brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 decreases by about 0.25% with respect to the rotation operation of 27 ° and decreases by about 0.16% with respect to the rotation operation with a rotation angle of 27 ° in the resistance value 20Ω-30Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. In the resistance range of 30 Ω to 40 Ω, the brightness adjustment button decreases by about 0.11% with respect to a rotation operation with a rotation angle of 27 °. In the range of resistance value 40Ω to 50Ω of the volume SDVR0, about 0.08% lower than the rotation operation of 27 ° in the section of the rotation angle, and to the rotation operation of rotation angle 27 ° in the section of the resistance value 50Ω to 60Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. About 0.06% lower, about 0.05% lower than 70Ω to 80Ω resistance value of brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, and about 0.05% lower than 70Ω to 80Ω resistance value of brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. It is about 0.04% lower, about 0.05% lower in the resistance value 80Ω-90Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, and about 0.09% lower in the resistance value 90Ω-100Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0.

  In the present embodiment, the backlight brightness of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 adjusted in the backlight brightness adjustment operation is about 72.5% with respect to the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. The resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted. In this case, the relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 and the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the luminance adjustment operation of the backlight is shown in FIG. When the curve is a solid line, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 that is about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 38Ω.

  By the way, in the hall, a plurality of pachinko machines are arranged opposite to the pachinko island facility, so that the internal temperature of the pachinko island facility gradually increases after the start of business. Therefore, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, which is about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work, is about 38Ω as described above. Even if it is adjusted, the brightness also changes due to temperature drift. For example, immediately after the opening of the hall, the internal temperature of the Pachinko Island facility is low, and the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work is also low. When the solid line curve in FIG. 118A at the temperature moves downward to the one-dot chain line curve in FIG. 118A, the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 72 with respect to the maximum rated luminance. Less than 5%. When the hall starts operation and the internal temperature of the Pachinko Island facility rises to the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment operation, the backlight brightness of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is shown by the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a). About 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness. Then, the internal temperature of the pachinko island facility further rises, and the resistance value is increased by 5%, and the solid line curve in FIG. 118 (a) at the ambient temperature during the backlight brightness adjustment work moves upward. In the case of the broken line 118 (a), the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is larger than about 72.5% with respect to the maximum rated luminance.

  Here, the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g composed of the resistors SDR5 and SDR6 which are fixed resistors and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 which is a semi-fixed variable resistor is used as a resistor SDR6 ′ which is a fixed resistor and the brightness adjustment which is a semi-fixed variable resistor. Consider a luminance adjustment circuit 3425g ′ that is configured by electrically connecting the volume SDVR0 ′ in series. The luminance adjustment circuit 3425g ′ is electrically connected in series with the variable terminal of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ whose one end is a fixed resistor whose other end is a grounded fixed resistor and whose other end is a semi-fixed variable resistor. The fixed terminal of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′, which is a fixed variable resistor, is electrically connected to the If adjustment terminal of the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f. As described above, when the current flowing through the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to about 15 mA to 25 mA so as not to exceed the maximum rated current (30 mA) of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, it is a fixed resistance. The combined resistance RSENS ′ composed of the resistor SDR6 ′ and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ that is a semi-fixed variable resistor is about 12Ω to 20Ω. If 10Ω is selected as the resistor SDR6 'that is a fixed resistor, 10Ω must be selected as the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0'. The 10Ω semi-fixed variable resistor is not a general-purpose product, is not easy to obtain and is expensive, and the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ from 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′. As the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is rotated toward 10Ω, the change amount of the combined resistance RSENS ′ with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation becomes a linear characteristic.

  If the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value, the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 and the luminance adjustment volume in the solid curve in FIG. The brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at 0Ω (zero Ω) where the resistance value of SDVR0 is the minimum resistance value is the same, and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is 10Ω which is the maximum resistance value. The luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at a certain time, and the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 when the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 in the solid curve in FIG. Are the same, the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is as described above. As described above, when the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is 0Ω (zero Ω) which is the minimum resistance value, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is about 45% with respect to the maximum rated brightness. When the value is 10Ω, it is about 85% with respect to the maximum rated luminance.

  Then, as the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is rotated from 0Ω (zero Ω) which is the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ to 10Ω which is the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′, the rotation operation is performed. Since the amount of change in the combined resistance RSENS ′ with respect to the manipulated variable is always constant, it does not have the curved shape shown in FIG. That is, the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is changed from 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 ′, to 10Ω, which is the maximum resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 ′. 'Is a characteristic straight line that changes in a straight line from about 45% to about 85% with respect to the maximum rated luminance as the rotational operation is performed. Therefore, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the total operation amount of the rotational operation. The total amount of change in the luminance of the backlight is about 40%.

  Assuming that the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ has a rotation angle of 0 ° to 270 ° as in the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the slope of the straight line with respect to the operation amount (resistance value) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is about 0.148% (= about 40% / 270 °). If the brightness adjustment circuit 3425g ′ composed of the resistance SDR6 ′ that is a fixed resistance and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ that is a semi-fixed variable resistance has a resistance value increased by 5% due to temperature drift, The luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is increased by 5% due to the upward movement of the characteristic line. On the other hand, if the resistance value is decreased by 5% due to temperature drift, the above characteristic line is By moving downward, the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reduced by 5%. On the other hand, in the luminance adjustment circuit 3425g in the present embodiment, the luminance adjustment volume is adjusted so that the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 72.5% in the solid curve in FIG. If the resistance value of SDVR0 is adjusted to about 38Ω from the state where the resistance value is increased by 5% due to temperature drift and becomes a broken line curve in FIG. 118 (a), the resistance value of brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is The resistance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at this resistance value is about 77%, which is about 4.5% larger, while the resistance value is temporarily reduced by 5% due to temperature drift. ), The resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is about 36Ω, and the sub liquid at this resistance value is Next luminance of the backlight of the display device 3450 is about 68%, about 4.5% smaller.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even if a temperature drift occurs, the above-described characteristic curve moves upward or downward, but the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is ± 4.5. %, The resistance SDR6 ′ that is a fixed resistance and the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ that is a semi-fixed variable resistance are electrically connected in series to each other in the luminance adjustment circuit 3425g ′. Compared with the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 3450 (within ± 5%), the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can be suppressed by 10%. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change in luminance of the backlight due to a temperature change (temperature drift).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, even if the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the maximum resistance value of 100Ω, the solid line in FIG. 118A at the ambient temperature during the brightness adjustment operation of the backlight Therefore, even if the internal temperature of the Pachinko Island facility rises due to temperature drift, the backlight luminance of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is maximum. It is about 90% of the rated brightness. In other words, even if temperature drift occurs, the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 does not reach the maximum rated luminance.

  Incidentally, as a technique having the luminance adjustment circuit 3425g ′ configured by electrically connecting the resistor SDR6 ′, which is a fixed resistor, and the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 ′, which is a semi-fixed variable resistor, in series, as described above, For example, a gaming machine in which a player can freely adjust the brightness of a backlight that illuminates a rotating reel according to his / her preference is proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-267899 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 4)). In the gaming machine described in this document, since a fixed resistor and a variable resistor are electrically connected in series to form a circuit, the resistance value of the variable resistor can be varied by operating the operation unit. Along with this, the resistance value of the combined resistor composed of the fixed resistor and the variable resistor is also varied so that the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted. By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, as described above, the fixed resistor and the variable resistor are electrically connected in series to form a circuit, and the change amount of the resistance value of the variable resistor is the resistance of the combined resistor. Since the amount of change is the value, the relationship between the resistance value of the variable resistor and the luminance of the backlight is changed as the operation unit is operated from the minimum resistance value to the maximum resistance value. The amount of change in the luminance of the backlight with respect to the amount of change in resistance value is a straight line that is always constant. Then, since the amount of change in the backlight brightness with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the variable resistor is always constant, the resistance value of the variable resistor rapidly increases with a small amount of operation of the operation unit before and after the target resistance value of the variable resistor. There arises a problem that it becomes difficult to finely adjust the luminance of the backlight.

[11-3. Backlight brightness adjustment work]
Next, backlight brightness adjustment work will be described. This backlight brightness adjustment operation is performed before the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the unused sub liquid crystal display device 3450 that has not been mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 yet. In addition, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 once installed in the hall and reused. When the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reused, the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 that has driven the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is discarded and is not yet mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 yet. A sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 is used.

  The backlight brightness adjustment work is performed by a manufacturer operator in the backlight brightness adjustment work process. The backlight brightness adjustment operation process is performed using various jigs and various devices fixed to the work table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118B, a mounting base ARL to which the luminance measuring device MOL is attached, a jig ARSL to which the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached, and a sub liquid crystal drive for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. A jig ARSD for attaching a sub liquid crystal driving substrate box 3430 in which the substrate 3425 is accommodated is fixed to the work table. The measurement surface of the luminance measuring device MOL attached to the mounting base ARL is opposed to the center of the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 attached to the jig ARSL, and is measured by the luminance measuring device MOL attached to the mounting base ARL. The mounting base ARL and the jig ARSL are respectively fixed to the work table so that the distance between the surface and the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 attached to the jig ARSL is a predetermined distance d. The luminance measured by the luminance measuring device MOL is displayed on a luminance display (not shown). The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 attached to the jig ARSL is electrically connected with various wirings from the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 of the sub liquid crystal drive board box 3430 attached to the jig ARSD. The sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 attached to the jig ARSD is also electrically connected with wiring from a controller (not shown) for drawing the entire display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 in white. ing.

  The sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 includes a sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 accommodated between a base member and a cover member combined with the base member, and the cover member and the base member are formed of a transparent synthetic resin material. ing. The cover member is formed with an adjustment hole 3430a into which an adjustment tool for rotating the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 can be inserted, and the above-described various wirings are electrically connected. Wiring holes are formed, and a plurality of ventilation holes for cooling the internal air of the sub liquid crystal driving substrate box 3430 are formed along the upper side and the lower side, respectively.

  When the operator of the manufacturer operates a controller (not shown) to transmit drawing data for drawing the entire display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 in white to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430, the sub liquid crystal The driving substrate 3425 renders the entire display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 in one white color. For example, when using (newly using) a sub liquid crystal display device 3450 that has never been used, the operator of the manufacturer adjusts the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 attached to the jig ARSD. The adjustment tool is inserted through the hole 3430a and is fitted into the recess SDVR0a (see FIG. 118 (d)) of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 housed in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430, and the luminance not shown. Rotate while watching the brightness displayed on the display. When the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is turned and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 reaches about 38Ω, the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f displays a white LED (first white LED of the first stage (first)) of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. By adjusting the current If flowing through the last stage (eighth) to the current for new use adjustment, the backlight luminance of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is greater than the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. About 72.5%. The brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated by inserting an adjustment tool from an adjustment hole 3430a in which the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 is formed, so that the adjustment hole 3430a is directly touched with a finger. I can't do that. In other words, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall, even if it is a hall clerk or the like, the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 cannot be rotated.

  The relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 and the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at the ambient temperature during the luminance adjustment operation of the backlight is a solid curve in FIG. 118 (a). When the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is operated, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to about 38Ω so that the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 72.5%. There is a need. The inclination of the characteristic curve of the backlight luminance of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotation operation of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 is, as described above, the rotation angle 27 in the section of the resistance value 0Ω (zero Ω) to 10Ω of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0. Is about 0.37% lower for the rotation operation of °, and about 0.25% lower for the rotation operation at a rotation angle of 27 ° in the resistance value range of 10Ω to 20Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. In the resistance value 20Ω to 30Ω section, about 0.16% lower for the rotation operation at the rotation angle of 27 °, and about 0 for the rotation operation of the rotation angle of 27 ° in the resistance value 30Ω to 40Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. .11% lower, the manufacturer's operator can minimize the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. When the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated from the resistance value 0Ω (zero Ω), the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the operation amount for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. As the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value of about 38Ω, the amount of operation for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 increases and the brightness adjustment becomes smaller. The resistance value of the volume SDVR0 can be gradually brought close to the target resistance value of about 38Ω. That is, in this embodiment, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the slope of the characteristic curve of the backlight brightness of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 smoothly decreases. Therefore, the operation amount for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be increased as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value.

  Here, the above-described brightness adjustment circuit 3425g ′ configured by electrically connecting in series the resistor SDR6 ′, which is a fixed resistor, and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′, which is a semi-fixed variable resistor, will be considered. The inclination of the characteristic curve of the backlight brightness of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 with respect to the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is constant at about 0.148%. Even if the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated from 0Ω (zero Ω), which is the minimum resistance value, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 ′ is quickly adjusted so that the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is obtained. It cannot be brought close to the target resistance value and is difficult to adjust. On the other hand, in the luminance adjustment circuit 3425g in the present embodiment, as described above, as the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 performs the rotation operation of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0. Since the slope of the backlight luminance characteristic curve is smoothly reduced, the slope is slightly larger until it approaches the target resistance value (0Ω (zero Ω) in the range of the resistance value 0 to 30Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0) The slope in the 10Ω section is the largest, the slope in the 10Ω to 20Ω section is the next, and the slope in the 20Ω to 30Ω section is large), and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is quickly reached to the target resistance value (about 30Ω) It can be close to the target resistance value (approx. 30Ω) When approaching, the inclination becomes smaller as it approaches the target resistance value (the inclination after the resistance value 30Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes smaller as the target resistance value is approached), and the operation amount for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes By enlarging the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 as it approaches the target resistance value, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be gradually brought closer to the target resistance value, and adjustment is easy. Therefore, it is possible to easily finely adjust the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

  In the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 once installed in the hall and reused, the maximum backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 has already been used in the backlight luminance adjustment process. Although the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to about 38Ω, which is the target resistance value, so as to be about 72.5% with respect to the rated brightness, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 8%. Assuming that the brightness has deteriorated by about%, the operator of the manufacturer works while looking at a luminance display (not shown) on which the luminance measured by the luminance measuring device MOL is displayed. Therefore, the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is displayed. The resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the target resistance value of about 38Ω so that it becomes about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of However, in actuality, according to the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a), the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is about 80.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. The resistance value is adjusted to about 65Ω.

  That is, assuming that the performance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is deteriorated, the current If flowing through the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is increased as compared with the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used. Therefore, it is necessary to return to the brightness when newly used. For this reason, the manufacturer operator increases the brightness value to increase the resistance value from the resistance value (about 38Ω) at the variable position of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 adjusted when the brightness of the unused sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is adjusted. The adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated. When the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is turned and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 reaches about 64Ω, the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f displays a white LED (first white LED of the first stage (first)) of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. The current If flowing through the final stage (eighth) is adjusted to a reuse adjustment current that is larger than the new use adjustment current, whereby the backlight brightness of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is adjusted to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Actually, the maximum rated luminance of the backlight is 72.5%. According to the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a), the reuse adjustment current corresponds to the white LED (the first stage (first) white) of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used. When the LED current adjustment circuit 3425f adjusts the current If flowing from the LED to the final stage (eighth), the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 becomes about 80.5%. If the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is deteriorated by about 10% exceeding about 8%, the manufacturer's operator displays the luminance measured by the luminance measuring device MOL. Therefore, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is set to about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Even if the value is adjusted to about 38Ω, it is actually about 82.5% of the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 according to the solid curve in FIG. 118A. In addition, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to about 76Ω.

[11-4. Variation in brightness adjustment]
Next, variations in brightness adjustment will be briefly described. In the above-described backlight luminance adjustment operation process, for example, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used, the manufacturer operator adjusts the adjustment hole formed in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 attached to the jig ARSD. The adjustment tool is inserted from 3430a and fitted into the recess SDVR0a (see FIG. 118 (d)) of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 of the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 accommodated in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430, and the sub liquid crystal display device The rotating operation is performed while viewing the luminance displayed on a luminance display (not shown) so that the luminance is about 72.5% with respect to the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of 3450.

  Therefore, as a luminance distribution with respect to the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 adjusted by such a rotation operation, the average value μ (mu) is 72.5%, the standard deviation (variation) σ (sigma) ) Is 1%, the range of the brightness adjustment variation 6σ is 69.5% to 75.5% according to the solid line curve in FIG. 118 (a). When this range is projected onto the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 axis side with respect to the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a), as shown in FIG. 118 (c), the brightness with respect to the section from −3σ to μ, that is, the maximum rated brightness is obtained. In the section from 69.5% to 72.5%, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is a section W0 that can be varied from about 31Ω to about 38Ω, and the section from μ to + 3σ, that is, the maximum rated brightness. In a section where the luminance is 72.5% to 75.5%, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is a section W1 that can be varied from about 38Ω to about 46Ω. The range in the section W0 is about 7Ω from about 31Ω to about 38Ω, whereas the range in the section W1 is about 8Ω from about 38Ω to about 46Ω, so the range in the section W0 is the range of the section W1. It is getting smaller. As described above, the relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 and the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is the characteristic indicated by the solid line curve in FIG. As the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated from the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 toward the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the amount of change in the combined resistance RSENS with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation This is because it has a characteristic that changes in a curved line shape.

  As described above, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used, the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 that is adjusted by rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 in the backlight brightness adjustment work step is used. Assuming that the luminance distribution with respect to the maximum rated luminance is a normal distribution with an average value μ (mu) of 72.5% and a standard deviation (variation) σ (sigma) of 1%, the resistance of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 The value is a section from about 31Ω to about 46Ω, that is, the section W0 + the section W1, and when converted into the rotation angle by the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, as described above, the resistance value per rotation angle of 1 °. Can be varied by about 0.37Ω, so that the angle is about 84 ° to about 124 °, and as shown in FIG. The range NR of the rotation angle when using the standard is about 40 °.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 once installed in the hall and reused, the sub liquid crystal display has already been performed in the backlight luminance adjustment operation process. Although the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is adjusted to the target resistance value of about 38Ω so that the maximum rated brightness of the backlight of the device 3450 is about 72.5%, it deteriorates by about 8%. The manufacturer adjusts the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 so that the backlight brightness of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 to be reused is about 72.5% of the maximum rated brightness. Then, in actuality, according to the solid curve in FIG. 118A, the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is about 80.5%. As described above, the adjusting the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 approximately 65 ohms. Even when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reused, the average value μ () is used as the luminance distribution with respect to the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 adjusted by rotating the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0. Assuming a normal distribution with 80.5% mu) and a standard deviation (variation) σ (sigma) of 1%, the range of the brightness adjustment variation 6σ is according to the solid line curve in FIG. 77.5% to 83.5%. When this range is projected onto the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 axis side with respect to the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a), the section from −3σ to μ, that is, the brightness with respect to the maximum rated brightness is 77.5% to 80.5%. In the section, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is a section W0 ′ in which the resistance value is varied from about 53Ω to about 65Ω, and the section from μ to + 3σ, that is, the brightness with respect to the maximum rated brightness is 80.5% to 83.83. In the section up to 5%, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is a section W1 ′ in which the resistance value is varied from about 65Ω to about 82Ω. The range in the section W0 ′ is about 12Ω from about 53Ω to about 65Ω, whereas the range in the section W1 ′ is about 17Ω from about 65Ω to about 82Ω. It is smaller than the range of W1 ′. As described above, the relationship between the operation amount (resistance value) of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 and the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is the characteristic indicated by the solid line curve in FIG. As the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is rotated from the minimum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 toward the maximum resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the amount of change in the combined resistance RSENS with respect to the operation amount of the rotation operation This is because it has a characteristic that changes in a curved line shape.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reused, it corresponds to the maximum rated luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 that is adjusted by rotating the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 in the backlight luminance adjustment operation process. Assuming that the luminance distribution is a normal distribution with an average value μ (mu) of 80.5% and a standard deviation (variation) σ (sigma) of 1%, the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 is about 53Ω. To about 82Ω, that is, section W0 ′ + section W1 ′, and when converted into the rotation angle by the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0, the resistance value per rotation angle of 1 ° is calculated as described above. Since it can be changed by about 0.37Ω, it is about 143 ° to about 221 °, and as shown in FIG. The rotation angle range RR is about 78 °, which is about twice as large as the rotation angle range NR (about 40 °) at the time of new use. That is, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used and reused, although the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 differs in the average value μ (mu), the standard deviation (variation) σ (sigma) If the rotation angle range RR at the time of reuse is approximately twice the rotation angle range NR at the time of new use, the manufacturer's worker can When the liquid crystal display device 3450 is reused, the backlight brightness adjustment work process is compared with the rotating operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 in the backlight brightness adjustment work process when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used. The amount of operation for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is the resistance of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0. Since the value can be further increased as the value approaches the target resistance value, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be gradually brought close to the target resistance value, and adjustment is easy.

  In other words, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is newly used or reused, the white LED of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (first stage (first) white LED to last stage (eighth)) is used. Although the flowing current If differs between the current at the time of new use adjustment and the current at the time of reuse adjustment, the amount of change in the current at the time of new use adjustment in the rotation angle range NR at the time of new use and the range RR of the rotation angle at the time of reuse. The amount of change in current at the time of reuse adjustment is the same, and the amount of operation to rotate the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 at the time of reuse compared to the amount of operation to rotate the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 at the time of new use Can be enlarged. Therefore, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reused, even if the backlight performance of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is deteriorated, the current at the time of new use adjustment in the rotation angle range NR at the time of new use. And the amount of change in current during reuse adjustment in the rotation angle range RR during reuse are the same, and the amount of change compared to the amount of operation for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 during new use By increasing the amount of operation for rotating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 during use, the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can be easily finely adjusted.

  Incidentally, a plurality of high-brightness white LEDs are used in the backlight of the liquid crystal display device, each LED is electrically connected to the driver IC via a current limiting resistor, and the CPU performs PWM control of the driver IC. Thus, a gaming machine that adjusts the luminance of the backlight has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2005-152227 (paragraphs [0034], [0035] and FIG. 7)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, since the current flowing through the high-intensity white LED is set by the current limiting resistor, if the performance of the LED deteriorates with time, the luminance of the backlight decreases. Will be. When reusing a liquid crystal display device, it is necessary to increase the current flowing to the LED in order to increase the brightness of the backlight. Therefore, it is necessary to remove the current limiting resistor and adjust the brightness of the backlight. The problem arises that it cannot be done easily.

  In the luminance adjustment circuit 3425g in the present embodiment, the variable position of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 adjusted when adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the unused sub liquid crystal display device 3450 (the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 at this variable position). As described above, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the sub liquid crystal with respect to the rotation operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is changed as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume is changed from about 38Ω to about 65Ω. Since the slope of the luminance characteristic curve of the backlight of the display device 3450 is smoothly reduced, the slope is slightly large until it approaches the target resistance value (30Ω in the resistance value 30Ω-60Ω section of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0). ~ The slope in the 40Ω section is the largest, then 40Ω ~ The slope in the 0Ω section is large and the slope in the 50Ω to 60Ω section is large), and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be quickly brought close to the target resistance value (about 60Ω), and before the target resistance value (about 60Ω), the inclination becomes smaller as it approaches the target resistance value (the inclination after the resistance value 60Ω of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 becomes smaller as the target resistance value is approached), and the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is turned. By increasing the amount as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 approaches the target resistance value, the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 can be gradually brought close to the target resistance value, and adjustment is easy. Therefore, even when an operator of the manufacturer adjusts the luminance of the backlight of the unused sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the luminance of the backlight can be easily adjusted.

[12. Circuit of decorative board]
Next, circuits and the like of various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, since the circuits of the various decorative boards are substantially the same circuit, the decorative board 5000 will be described. Note that the circuits of the various decorative boards are substantially the same circuit means that the operation of the circuit is the same because of the difference between a single or a plurality of LED driving ICs to be described later. Some are mounted on the board, others are electrically connected from the connector via wiring). An LED drive IC, which will be described later, is also mounted on the lamp drive board 4170, and has the same operation as that of the LED drive IC mounted on various decorative boards. FIG. 119 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a decorative board, and FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing an electrical connection of each subsequent decorative board.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the decorative substrate 5000 mainly includes a noise removal circuit NC and an LED drive ICDLIC0. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a flashing signal or a gradation lighting signal from the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK is supplied to the decoration board 5000 via the lamp driving board 4170. While being input to the input connector DLCN0, + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V are supplied from the peripheral control board 4140 to the input connector DLCN0 of the decorative board 5000 via the lamp driving board 4170. The ground (GND) from the peripheral control board 4140 is input to the input connector DLCN0 of the decorative board 5000 via the lamp driving board 4170, and the peripheral control board 4140, the lamp driving board 4170, and the decorative board 5000 are the same. It is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The noise removal circuit NC removes noise from the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK input to the decorative board 5000, and includes a filter circuit 5000a and a Schmitt-equipped buffer circuit 5000b. It is mainly composed. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK are first shaped into waveforms in the Schmitt-equipped buffer circuit 5000b after components such as noise are first removed in the filter circuit 5000a. It has become.

  Specifically, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK input to the decorative board 5000 are first input to the filter circuit 5000a. The filter circuit 5000a includes two low-pass filter circuits A and B. In the game board side light emission data SL-DAT, components such as noise are removed by the low-pass filter circuit A composed of the resistor DLR0 and the capacitor DLC0, and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK includes the resistor DLR1 and the capacitor DLC1. A component such as noise is removed by a low-pass filter circuit B constituted by:

  The game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK from which components such as noise have been removed are input to the Schmitt-equipped buffer circuit 5000b and shaped into a normal waveform. Here, shaping to “normal waveform” means that when components such as noise are removed from the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK in the filter circuit 5000a, the high frequency component is changed. Since the waveform is eliminated and the waveform is rounded (the rising edge and falling edge of the rectangular waveform become gentle), this is shaped into the original rectangular waveform (that is, the rising edge and falling edge are sharpened).

  The Schmitt-equipped buffer circuit 5000b is an IC including six Schmitt-equipped inverters A to F. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT is a serial data input terminal of the LED drive ICDLIC0 by reversing the logic by the inverter A with Schmitt at the previous stage and by reversing the logic at the inverter B with Schmitt at the rear stage. In addition to being input to the SDT terminal, the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the gaming board side is inverted in logic by the inverter C with Schmitt at the front stage and inverted by the inverter D with Schmitt at the rear stage to return the logic to the original state. The signal is input to the SCLK terminal, which is the clock signal input terminal of the driving ICDLIC0.

  The LED drive ICDLIC0 to which the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is inputted in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK has nine output channels (ch), and each channel has a maximum of 80 mA (milliampere). This is a 9ch constant current LED driver IC capable of outputting current. The LED driving ICDLIC0 mainly includes an address setting unit DLIC0a, a logic processing unit DLIC0b, a clock generation unit DLIC0c, a data buffer unit DLIC0d, a PWM unit DLIC0e, and a constant current driving unit DLIC0f. The address setting unit DLIC0a can set 64 addresses to the LED driving ICDLIC0 according to the magnitude of the voltage applied to the three address setting terminals ID0 to ID2. The voltage applied to the three address setting terminals ID0 to ID2 is any of + 5.25V (Vcc), 2 / 3Vcc, 1 / 3Vcc, and ground (GND), and 2 / 3Vcc and 1 / 3Vcc are The voltage is divided by resistors DLR2 to DLR4 that are electrically connected in series between + 5.25V and the ground (GND).

  Specifically, + 5.25V is supplied to one end of the resistor DLR2, the other end of the resistor DLR2 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor DLR3, and the other end of the resistor DLR3 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor DLR4. The other end of the resistor DLR4 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the resistance values of the resistors DLR2 to DLR4 are the same. As a result, the voltage at which the other end of the resistor DLR3 and one end of the resistor DLR4 are electrically connected becomes 1/3 Vcc, which is a third of the voltage with respect to +5.25 V (Vcc), and the other end of the resistor DLR2 And one end of the resistor DLR3 are electrically connected to 2/3 Vcc, which is a voltage that is two thirds of +5.25 V (Vcc).

  In the present embodiment, of the three address setting terminals ID0 to ID2, 2/3 Vcc is applied to the address setting terminal ID0, 1/3 Vcc is applied to the address setting terminal ID1, and ground (GND) is applied to the address setting terminal ID2. By being grounded, a fixed value of 12 is set by the address setting unit DLIC0 as the address of the LED driving ICDLIC0. As described above, the address of the LED driving ICDLIC0 is set by the address setting unit DLIC0 according to the hardware configuration of the voltages applied to the three address setting terminals ID0 to ID2, and therefore receives data by software. Therefore, it is not set appropriately.

  The logic processing unit DLIC0b receives the game board side light emission data SL-DAT in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK and transmits it to the data buffer unit DLIC0d. The data buffer unit DLIC0d determines whether or not the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the logic processing unit DLIC0b is for itself based on the address of the LED drive ICDLIC0 set by the address setting unit DLIC0a. When the content (address) of the address data included in the board side light emission data SL-DAT matches the address of the LED drive ICDLIC0 set by the address setting unit DLIC0a, the game board side light emission from the logic processing unit DLIC0b It is determined that the data SL-DAT is for itself, and the gradation data defining the light emission mode of the LED of each channel is extracted from the game board side emission data SL-DAT, and based on the extracted gradation data, The gradation level in each channel is set to PWM part DLIC0. On the other hand, when the content (address) of the address data included in the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the address of the LED drive ICDLIC0 set by the address setting unit DLIC0a do not match, It is determined that the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the processing unit DLIC0b is not for itself, and gradation data defining the light emission mode of the LED of each channel is not extracted from the game board side light emission data SL-DAT. Control is performed to maintain the current contents set in the unit DLIC0e.

  The PWM unit DLIC0e can perform gradation control of the brightness (gradation degree) of the LED in each channel in 128 steps of gradation degrees 0 to 127 from turn-off to lighting (maximum luminance). The gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit for the channel. That is, in the PWM unit DLIC0e, gradation control is performed by the PWM gradation control unit 0 for the LED in 0ch, gradation control is performed by the PWM gradation control unit 1 for the LED in 1ch,. It is composed of a total of nine PWM gradation control units 0 to 8 in which gradation control is performed on the LED by the PWM gradation control unit 8. When the gradation levels are set, the PWM gradation control units 0 to 8 control the constant current drive unit DLIC0f so that a current having the set gradation level flows based on the clock signal from the clock generation unit DLIC0c. I do.

  The constant current drive unit DLIC0f allows a constant current to flow through the LED by one constant current driver for one channel so as to achieve the gradation set in the PWM gradation control units 0 to 8. A constant current flows through the constant current driver 0 for the LED, a constant current flows through the constant current driver 1 for the LED in the 1ch, and so on, and a constant current flows through the constant current driver 8 for the LED in the 8ch. That is, it is composed of nine constant current drivers 0 to 8 in total. The constant current drivers 0 to 2 are electrically connected to one end of a resistor DLR5 for setting the maximum current to be passed through the LEDs in the three channels from 0ch to 2ch, and the other end of the resistor DLR5 is grounded (GND). The constant current drivers 3 to 4 are electrically connected to one end of a resistor DLR6 for setting the maximum current to be passed through the LEDs in three channels 3ch to 5ch, and the other end of the resistor DLR6 is grounded (GND). The constant current drivers 6 to 8 are electrically connected to one end of a resistor DLR7 for setting the maximum current to be passed through the LEDs in the three channels 6ch to 8ch, and the other end of the resistor DLR7 is grounded ( GND).

  The constant currents from the constant current drivers 0 to 8 flow from the output connector DLCN1 to the LEDs via the resistors DLR8 to DLR16 in 0ch to 8ch.

  Note that +5.25 V is applied to the Vcc terminal that is the power supply terminal of the LED drive ICDLIC0, and the ground (GND) is grounded to the RST terminal that is the reset terminal and the GND terminal that is the ground terminal.

  Further, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control board 4140 whose logic is inverted by the first stage Schmitt inverter A of the Schmitt buffer circuit 5000b is output to the external board output in addition to the rear stage Schmitt inverter B. The logic is inverted by the inverter E with Schmitt at the subsequent stage and returned to the original state, and output from the output connector DLCN2 to the decoration board 5001 which is the subsequent decoration board via the resistor DLR17 which is a damping resistance (resistance to reduce reflection noise). The game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK from the peripheral control board 4140 whose logic is inverted by the first stage Schmitt inverter C of the Schmitt buffer circuit 5000b is supplied to the external board in addition to the rear stage Schmitt inverter D. Inverted logic F in the rear stage Schmitt inverter F for output Is to be output to the decorative substrate 5001 is a subsequent decorative substrate from the output connector DLCN2 through resistor DLR18 a damping resistor returns to the original (resistance to reduce reflection noise). At this time, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is output to the decoration board 5001 which is a subsequent decoration board in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. In addition to the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and ground (GND) are the decorative boards that are the following decorative boards from the same connector. 5001 is output and supplied.

  As described above, the logic on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control board 4140 whose logic is inverted by the first Schmitt inverter A of the Schmitt buffer circuit 5000b is inverted by the latter Schmitt inverter B. It returns to the original state and is input to the SDT terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the LED drive ICDLIC0. As a result, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control board 4140 whose logic is inverted by the inverter B with Schmitt at the subsequent stage and returned to the original is when the plurality of LED driving ICs are mounted on the decorative board. In the latter stage Schmitt inverter B, even if the C component increases in the signal for transmitting the game board side light emission data SL-DAT by distributing to a plurality of signals, the signal waveform is slightly blunted. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT distributed in the inverter B is configured not to be output to the subsequent decorative board, and the logic is inverted by the inverter E with Schmitt at the subsequent stage for output of the external board to return to the original state. Since the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control board 4140 is output to the subsequent decorative board, The signal board side light emission data SL-DAT signal waveform is adjusted by the Schmitt inverters A and E every time a number of decorative boards are passed, and the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted. Even if the transmission path becomes long via a plurality of decorative boards, it is possible to prevent the signal waveform transmitting the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from increasing and the signal waveform from becoming dull. It has become. In addition, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control board 4140 whose logic is inverted by the first stage Schmitt inverter A of the Schmitt buffer circuit 5000b is logically output by the second stage Schmitt inverter E for external board output. Since it is inverted and returned to the decoration board 5001 which is the subsequent decoration board via the resistor DLR17 which is a damping resistance, the output terminal of the Schmitt-equipped inverter B and the serial data of the LED driving ICDLIC0 are assumed. Even if there is an influence of noise or the like between the input terminal and the SDT terminal, the output terminal of the first stage Schmitt inverter A and the external terminal are cut off by blocking the influence of this noise with the latter Schmitt inverter B. Between the terminals of the inverter E with Schmitt in the latter stage for board output, So that the effect of is not transmitted.

  Further, the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side from the peripheral control board 4140, the logic of which is inverted by the first stage of the Schmitt inverter C of the buffer circuit 5000b with the Schmitt, is inverted by the inverter D of the rear stage of Schmitt. Is returned to the original state and is input to the SCLK terminal which is the clock signal input terminal of the LED drive ICDLIC0. As a result, the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK from the peripheral control board 4140 that has been inverted by the logic of the inverter D with Schmitt in the subsequent stage and is restored to the original is mounted with a plurality of LED driving ICs on the decorative board. Even if the waveform of the signal is slightly blunted even if the C component increases in the signal for transmitting the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK by distributing to the plurality in the inverter D with Schmitt at the latter stage, The game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK distributed in the Schmitt inverter D is configured not to be output to the subsequent decorative board, and the logic is inverted by the latter Schmitt inverter F for external board output. The game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK from the peripheral control board 4140 that has been restored is output to the subsequent decorative board. Therefore, every time a plurality of decorative boards are used, the waveform of the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK is adjusted by the Schmitt-equipped inverters C and F, and the game board side from the peripheral control board 4140 is arranged. Even when the transmission path for transmitting the light emission clock signal SL-CLK becomes long via a plurality of decorative boards, the C component increases in the signal for transmitting the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, and the waveform of the signal is increased. The dullness can be prevented. In addition, the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK from the peripheral control board 4140 whose logic is inverted by the first stage Schmitt inverter C of the Schmitt buffer circuit 5000b is logically output by the rear stage Schmitt inverter F for external board output. Is inverted and returned to the decoration board 5001 which is a subsequent decoration board via the resistor DLR18 which is a damping resistance. Even if there is an influence of noise or the like between the terminals of the SCLK terminal which is a signal input terminal, the influence of the noise is blocked by the inverter D with Schmitt at the subsequent stage, and the output terminal of the inverter C with Schmitt at the first stage, Terminal of input terminal of inverter F with Schmidt in the latter stage for external board output In, so that is not transmitted its influence.

  Further, in one decorative board, the C component increases in the signal for transmitting the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK from the peripheral control board 4140, and the waveform of the signal becomes dull. A function that a predetermined number of LED driving ICs can be mounted on the output side of the Schmitt inverters B and D, a game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control board 4140, and a game board side light emission clock. Even when the transmission path for transmitting the signal SL-CLK becomes long through a plurality of decorative boards, the waveforms of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are adjusted by the Schmitt-equipped inverters A and E, and the Schmitt-equipped By the inverter C and F adjusting the waveform of the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, the transmission path becomes longer. It can be achieved by the use without leaving the function of being able to prevent the waveform of the signal due to an increase in C component weakens, six Schmitt with inverter A~F provided in one IC everything.

  Here, the structure of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal from the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK will be briefly described. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT includes a start command, an address, a sub-address, a PWM setting, and a period command, and each has 8-bit information.

  The start command is 11111111B (“B” represents a bit. The same applies hereinafter), which is a fixed value. The LED driving ICs provided on the various decorative boards and the lamp driving board 4170 can determine that the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is received by the start command.

  The address transmitted following the start command is for designating the address of the LED driving IC that takes in the game board side light emission data SL-DAT. Since the address of 12 is the value 12, 00001100B is set.

  The sub-address transmitted after the address designates one of output channel (ch) setting, all channel (ch) setting, and special mode setting. As the output channel (ch) setting, 000000010B is set for 0ch, 000000100B is set for 1ch, 00000010B is set for 2ch, 000001000B is set for 3ch, and 4ch is set. 000001010B is set, 00000100100B is set for 5ch, 00000110B is set for 6ch, 00000100B is set for 7ch, and 00001000010B is set for 8ch. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT (PWM setting) is set for the output channel (ch). The all channel (ch) setting is 001000000B, which is a fixed value, and the captured game board side light emission data SL-DAT (PWM setting) is set at a time for all the channels (ch). The same PWM setting is used for all channel (ch) settings. The special mode setting is 01100000B, which is a fixed value. Unlike all channel (ch) settings, individual PWM settings are set at once for all 9 channels from 0ch to 8ch.

  The PWM setting transmitted following the subaddress defines the gradation. As for the gradation, the least significant bit is fixed to 0, and the remaining 7 bits set a total of 128 gradations of gradations 0 to 127. For example, 000000000B is set when the gradation is 0, 00000010B is set when the gradation is 1,..., 11111100B is set when the gradation is 126, and the gradation is 127. In this case, 11111110B is set. When the output channel (ch) setting or the all channel (ch) setting is used as the sub-address described above, the data set for the PWM setting is one, that is, 8 bits, whereas the special mode setting is used. Is set with a size of 72 bits (= 8 bits × 9 ch) in which all 9ch PWM settings of 0ch to 8ch continue from 0ch to 8ch. In other words, when all channels (ch) are set, one PWM setting is set at a time for all 9 channels from 0ch to 8ch, while when the special mode is set, 9ch from 0ch to 8ch. For all, individual PWM settings are set at once.

  The period command transmitted following the PWM setting is 10000001B, which is a fixed value. The LED driving ICs provided on the various decorative boards and the lamp driving board 4170 can determine that all of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT has been received by the period command.

  Next, various decorative boards following the lamp driving board 4170 will be briefly described. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and ground (for outputting a flashing signal or a gradation lighting signal in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK from the peripheral control board 4140 GND) is input to the lamp driving board 4170 and is input to each subsequent decorative board via the lamp driving board 4170. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120, each decoration provided from the lamp driving board 4170 to the decoration board 5000, the decoration board 5001, the decoration board 5002, the side lamp decoration board 3014 of the side prize opening member 2200, and the center accessory 2300. Subsequent decorative substrates are electrically connected in the order of a substrate (first decorative substrate, second decorative substrate,..., Twelfth decorative substrate), decorative substrate 5003,. It is connected to the. Each decorative board is mounted with the above-described noise removal circuit (filter circuit and Schmitt-equipped buffer circuit) and LED driving IC, and the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and game board are connected to the input connector. Side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V and ground (GND) are input, while game board side light emission data SL-DAT, game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, +5 are output from the output connector. The input / output interface is common to output .25V, + 12V, + 24V, and ground (GND). Therefore, for example, the decorative substrate 5001, the decorative substrate 5001, the decorative substrate 5002,... Are sequentially connected in the order of the decorative substrate 5000, the decorative substrate 5001, the decorative substrate 5002,. And the following decorative substrates can be electrically connected in a daisy chain in the order of the decorative substrate 5000, the decorative substrate 5002, the decorative substrate 5001,. Further, even if the decorative board 5001 becomes defective for some reason and cannot be used, wiring for electrically connecting the output connector DLCN1 of the decorative board 5000 and the input connector of the decorative board 5001, The wiring that electrically connects the output connector of the board 5001 and the input connector of the decoration board 5002 is removed, and the board between the decoration board 5000 and the decoration board 5002 can be used due to a problem. By connecting the output connector of the decorative board 5000 and the input connector of the decorative board 5002 by wiring without going through the lost decorative board 5001, the decorative board 5000, the decorative board 5002,. Each of the decorative substrates can be electrically connected in a daisy chain.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the following various decorative substrates are electrically connected in a daisy chain from the first decorative substrate 5000 to the final decorative substrate 5010 (in other words, the subsequent various decorative substrates). In each decorative board, the buffer circuit with Schmitt is connected to the game board side light emission data SL-DAT from the peripheral control board 4140 and the game board side light emission clock. When the signal SL-CLK is received by the Schmitt-equipped inverters A and C, which are first-stage buffers, respectively, it is output to the LED drive ICDLIC0 via the Schmitt-equipped inverters B and D, and for external output different from the latter-stage buffers. Subsequent decorative board via Schmidt inverters E and F, which are subsequent buffers Since it is possible to output, it is possible to shorten the wiring between the various LEDs and the decorative substrate by being able to arrange the decorative substrate close to where the various LEDs are disposed, and to extremely reduce the space for routing the wiring. Can do. Thereby, in order to secure the space for routing the wiring from the following various decorative boards to the various LEDs, it is possible to suppress the restriction of the arrangement of the decorative members and the degree of design freedom. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the limitation on the arrangement of the decorative member and the limitation on the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member due to the wiring.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration in which various decorative substrates are subdivided, the size of the decorative substrate can be reduced, and the shape of the decorative substrate can also be formed so that it can be accommodated in the decorative member. A decorative member rich in design can be provided on the game board 4.

  Further, since the decorative boards are electrically connected in a daisy chain, the LED driving ICs mounted on the decorative board one by one from the decorative board 5000, which is the first decorative board, to the final decorative board 5010. By testing the light emission mode by designating the address, it is possible to inspect which decorative board after the decorative board cannot emit the LED correctly due to the influence of noise, and is susceptible to the influence of noise. The decorative board can be specified (in other words, the area of the game board 4 that is easily affected by noise) can be specified.

  Furthermore, since each decoration board is electrically connected in a daisy chain and the LED driving IC mounted on each decoration board can be specified by an address, if it is affected by noise on one decoration board. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT will be received as abnormal in the subsequent decorative board after the one decorative board affected by the noise, but at least the one affected by the noise Since the LED driving IC can normally receive the game board side light emission data SL-DAT in the decorative board up to the front of the decorative board, it is mounted on the decorative board up to the front of the one decorative board affected by the noise. An effect can be advanced by causing the LED drive IC to emit light that is electrically connected via the LED or the connector.

  Each decorative board has a game board side light emission data SL-DAT, a game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and a ground (GND) input to an input connector, while an output connector. Since the game board side light emission data SL-DAT, game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and ground (GND) are output in common, Of the following various decorative boards that are electrically connected in a daisy chain from the first-stage decorative board 5000 to the final-stage decorative board 5010 shown in FIG. 120, there is a problem with one of the decorative boards for some reason. If it is generated and can no longer be used, the output connector of the decoration board one before the one decoration board By electrically connecting the input connector of the decoration board immediately after the one decoration board with wiring, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT, the game board side without going through the one decoration board The light emission clock signals SL-CLK, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and ground (GND) are electrically connected to the decoration board one before the one decoration board and the decoration board one after the one decoration board. Can be connected.

  At this time, by electrically connecting the output connector of the decorative board immediately before the one decorative board and the input connector of the decorative board immediately after the one decorative board with the wiring, the wiring becomes long. (The wiring is for electrically connecting the output connector of the decorative board immediately before the one decorative board and the input connector of the decorative board, and the output connector of the single decorative board and the decorative board of the single decorative board. It becomes easier to be affected by noise by being longer than the wiring that electrically connects the input connector of the next decorative board. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing a noise removal circuit on each decoration board, noise entering the wiring is removed by a noise removal circuit provided on the decoration board immediately after one decoration board. Therefore, the normal game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK are provided with a Schmitt provided on the decoration board immediately after the one decoration board. A buffer with Schmitt that can be transmitted to the LED driving IC provided on the decoration board immediately after the one decoration board via the buffer circuit, and provided on the decoration board after the one decoration board. The signal can be transmitted from the output connector of the decorative board immediately after the decorative board to the subsequent decorative board via the circuit. Therefore, among various subsequent decorative boards that are electrically connected in a daisy chain from the first-stage decorative board 5000 to the final-stage decorative board 5010, a problem occurs in one decorative board for some reason. Even if it becomes impossible to do so, the output connector of the decoration board immediately before one decoration board and the input connector of the decoration board immediately after one decoration board are electrically connected by wiring. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT, except for one decorative board that has become incapable of being used due to the first-aid decoration board 5000 to the final decoration board 5010 due to the emergency measures. The game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and the ground (GND) can be reliably transmitted.

  In addition, the wiring which electrically connects the output connector of the decoration board immediately before one decoration board and the input connector of the decoration board immediately after one decoration board used for such an emergency treatment. A plurality of spare wirings (that is, spare wirings) are stored at predetermined positions on the back surface of the game board 4 so that a player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot touch at all. A storage space capable of storing a plurality of spare wirings may be formed on the back surface of the game board 4, or a hook portion for storing a plurality of spare wirings may be provided on the back surface of the game board 4. Good. As a result, the spare wiring is not stored in a place away from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, in a management room separate from the hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed), but instead of the gaming board 4 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By storing a plurality of pieces in a predetermined place on the back surface, a store clerk or the like of the hall opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turning it to one side. The preliminary wiring is taken out from a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board 4 so that the wiring work can be quickly performed. Since the length of the spare wiring is set in advance so as to be able to straddle one decorative board, a plurality of spare wirings can be accommodated without being bulky at a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board 4. In this way, with the first-aid measures described above, lighting effects such as lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting with various LEDs are performed, except for one decorative board that has become incapable of being used due to some reason. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be operated until the repair person of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 arrives at the hall. Therefore, it is possible to operate until a repair person in charge of the manufacturer arrives by taking an emergency measure against the occurrence of a problem.

  In addition, in a case where a defect occurs in one decoration board among the decoration board 5000 in the first stage to the decoration board 5010 in the last stage, it is difficult to use the decoration board in one stage. By electrically connecting the board and the decoration board immediately after the one decoration board with the spare wiring, the length of the spare wiring is the output connector of the decoration board immediately before the one decoration board. The length of the wiring for electrically connecting the input connector of one decorative board, and the wiring for electrically connecting the output connector of one decorative board and the input connector of the decorative board immediately after the one decorative board Even if the length of the spare wiring becomes longer than the length of the spare circuit, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game are provided by the noise removal circuit provided on the decoration board immediately after the one decoration board. Panel-side light emission clock signal SL-C And it is capable of removing noise from K. The length of the spare wiring is set in advance so as to straddle one decorative board, and is stored in a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board 4. Thereby, since the length of the spare wiring is set in advance to a length that can straddle one decorative board, a plurality of spare wirings can be accommodated without being bulky at a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board 4. When a hall clerk or the like becomes unable to use a decorative board due to any reason, the hall clerk takes out the spare wiring from a predetermined position on the back of the game board 4 and It is possible to quickly perform a wiring operation (first-aid measure) for electrically connecting the output connector of the previous light emission control means and the input connector of the decorative board immediately after the one decorative board with a preliminary wiring. it can.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine in which a plurality of digital IC circuits that receive serial data controls the brightness of a plurality of multi-color LEDs has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-190416 (paragraph [0043] and FIG. 13). )). In the gaming machine described in this document, the brightness can be adjusted by managing the time for applying a pulse current to the multi-color LED by the number of predetermined time elements. However, in the gaming machine described in this document, a substrate on which a plurality of digital IC circuits are mounted and a multi-color LED accommodated in a decorative member are electrically connected by wiring, so that a multi There is a problem that the arrangement of the decorative member and the degree of freedom of design are limited in order to secure a space for routing the wiring to the color LED.

[13. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 122 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 124 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 122, and FIG. 124 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. Various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the board 4100 will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When inputted, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to store the upper plate 301 or When the lower plate 302 is electrically connected to a device for paying out a game ball as a rental ball (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 121 (a). In addition, commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated. In the command 11H, two prize balls are designated, and in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that pays out game balls directly to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as balls for lending) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 121 (b), paying out from the main control board 4100 Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to the control board 4110, one prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... In 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game ball by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 121 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits); And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, common figure synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect is based on the detection signal from the upper start-up switch 3022 shown in FIG. 97. As shown in FIG. 122, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the upper special symbol display 1185, it is composed of commands with names of special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 tuning effect is started. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 97. As shown in FIG. 122, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the lower special symbol display unit 1186, it is composed of commands having names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 122, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closed display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for the winning prize opening 1 is started during the opening of the winning prize opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the attack unit 2100 shown in FIG. 95). The command indicating that the Nth round of the grand prize opening 2103 is being opened or the opening is started, and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command starts the closing of the grand prize opening 1 between rounds (the grand prize opening of the attacker unit 2100) 2103 during the closing of the round or start of closing), the winning prize 1 count display command has been detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2103), and the jackpot ending command is the jackpot endy Is intended to instruct the grayed start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening or opening of the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the count switch 2110 detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2100). The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100) and is sent to the winning prize. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the winning prize opening 1 (when the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that has entered the winning prize opening 2103 is counted. The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted when the small hit opening starts, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 122, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the respective state effects (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated). ).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power failure or instantaneous power failure, and when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is executed. The power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 97. As shown in FIG. The command 1189 is composed of commands with the names of start of ordinary drawing synchronization effect, designation of ordinary symbol, end of ordinary figure synchronization effect, and designation of state at the time of change. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), and the variable state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Normal electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 95 that are opened and closed by the driving of the start-up solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 97. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named “Opening per figure”, “Opening of public power”, and “Ending per common figure”. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command is a normal power open start (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are expanded in the horizontal direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 123, the notification display section includes commands having the names of winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (while the condition device is operating) (a game ball enters the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit) (When the count switch 2110 detects), an instruction to start winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display when a disconnection / short-circuit of the electrical connection occurs. Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 97.

  The door opening command is generated when the main body frame 3 receives the detection signal (open signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame 5 is open or when the door frame 5 is open with respect to the main body frame 3, the door open command is instructed. Based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When it is in a state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. The command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission to the command, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is one of the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, etc. , Which is sent when any one of them is broken or short-circuited, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when abnormality is detected in the magnetic detection switch 3024, and the door opening command is detected when door opening is detected (door frame opening). Based on the detection signals from the switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, the body frame When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3), and the door closing command is detected when the door is closed ( Based on the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Sent if it is in a state). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 123, the status display section includes commands named “frame state 1”, “error cancellation navigation”, and “frame state 2”. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed description thereof will be described later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 123, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted when the error cancellation navigation is performed. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 123, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the sound source IC 4150c of the peripheral control section 4150, the liquid crystal control section 4160, the liquid crystal output board 3420, the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, shown in FIG. 100). (Inspection of various substrates such as the lamp driving substrate 4170, the motor driving substrate 4180, and the frame decoration driving amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure and the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is executed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 123, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect. When the game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022, Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 2109, it instructs to start the production when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102. The command for instructing state transition to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state is instructed. The high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol. 1 to 0 hold (the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. 95 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 does not display the variation of the special symbol. The special symbol 2 storage command is used to transmit 0 to 4 special symbol 2 hold commands (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 95). The special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls that have not been used yet for the special symbol variation display (the number of holdings), and the normal symbol storage command is 0 to 4 normal symbol 1 holds. (A game ball passes through the gate part 2350 shown in FIG. 95, and the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls not yet used for the normal symbol variation display (the number of holdings)). The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is pre-read based on the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display on the special display 1118 on the function display board 1191. The special symbol display 1118 is used for instructing the start of a pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result. The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command indicates that the special symbol 2 hold is specially displayed on the special symbol display 1186 below the function display board 1191. Prior to being used for symbol change display, a pre-read effect is instructed to pre-read and notify the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening prize (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or the lower start opening switch 21) (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, and the upper left shown in FIG. The main part speaker 262 and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. 78 are transmitted mainly to notify the user of the fact, and the change shortening operation end designation command is the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after digesting the specified number of changes. The high probability end designation command is sent at the time (after the outage stop period elapses), and the stop period ends after the change is confirmed by digesting the high probability count in the case of “high probability N times” The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the upper special symbol display on the function display board 1191). In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for the change display of the special symbol in 1185, when the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the upper special symbol indicator The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of the special symbol 2 operation on-holding balls changes (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102). In a state where there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the special symbol variation display on the lower special symbol display 1186 on the function display board 1191, a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the number of reserves increases. Or when the number of reserved symbols is reduced using the special symbol display 1186 on the lower special symbol display 1186 and the number of reserved symbols is reduced) (In the state where the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and there is a reserved number that is not yet used for the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191, the game ball passes further through the gate portion 2350. The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is sent to the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command when the reserved number increases or when the normal symbol display 1189 uses the normal symbol display 1189 to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Sent when the number of symbols 1 actuated reserve ball increases (when the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the number of reserves increases), the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command increases the number of special symbol 2 actuated reserve balls Sent at the time of addition (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the holding number increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is received at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or from the lower start opening switch 2109. (When a game ball enters the lower start opening 2102 based on the detection signal), the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262 and the lower speaker 821 are notified mainly by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 100 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the side speakers 130 and 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821 are used to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent acts in addition to the voice notification. It is of the specification to do. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and can receive voice from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821. Some specifications do not report.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 124, each command from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  In the frame state 1 command, a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection are prepared in 50 or more stocks, and in a ball breakage, bit 0 (B0, “B” represents a bit). Value 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when full, bit 1 (B2) is set to 1 when there are 50 or more stocks, and bit 3 (B3) is set when connection is abnormal 1 is set, and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error canceling navigation command, there are provided a sphere, a count switch error, and a retry error. In the case of a sphere, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and in a count switch error, a value is set in bit 3 (B3). 1 is set, and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 98 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S360 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 125, and FIG. 127 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. 160 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the initial value update type counter (range closer to the maximum value side), and FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the initial value update type counter (minimum). The range is closer to the value side). First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and an initial value for determining the big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit determination random number Random number for use in determining whether or not to generate reach (reach out of reach) when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol shown in FIG. The random display pattern random number for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the symbol display 1186 and the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when generating the big hit gaming state The jackpot symbol for use in determining the jackpot symbol to be derived and displayed, and the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of this jackpot symbol A random number for determining an initial value, a random number for a small hit symbol for use in determining a small hit symbol to be derived and displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when a small hit gaming state is generated, A random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol for use in determining an initial value of a random number for a winning symbol is prepared. In addition to these random numbers, for determining the normal symbol per random number for use in determining whether or not the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. 95 is opened and closed, and for determining the initial value of the random symbol for normal symbol determination. Random numbers for determining initial values for normal symbols to be used, random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns for use in determining the variation display pattern of ordinary symbols that are variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 0 to the maximum value 32767 as the minimum value). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing by 1 each time a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. The counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the big hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the big hit determination random number. Further, the above-described random number for determining per ordinary symbol and the random number for determining initial value for determining per normal symbol are the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hit.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, as described above, for determining the initial value for the jackpot determination The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control side power-on process described later is performed. In FIG. 97, the check sum value (sum value) obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) stored at power-off is not the same, The initial value determination random number is a fixed numerical range of a counter in which the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 97 takes out the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM and updates the jackpot determination random number based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set to the initial value determining random number for determining the big hit is derived using the ID code, and the ID that is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM and the first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the code is stored Thus, the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a big hit. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is assigned a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a ′ provided in the other game board 4 ′. That is, in the other game boards 4 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is not useful at all on the other game board 4 ', that is, the other pachinko gaming machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if aiming at a starting prize for causing a game ball to enter the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. A gaming state cannot be generated.

[14-2. Operation of counter with initial value update type]
As shown in FIG. 160, the initial value update type counter, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number based on the extracted ID code is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value as the first cycle. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number as the initial value determination random number for the big hit determination The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number updates a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a value 0 as a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, as a range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), a value 10 to a value 209 are set for a low probability, and a value 10 to a value 339 are set for a high probability. As shown in the figure, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range in which the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value is closer to the minimum value side in either the low probability or the high probability. Will be set. In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the time when it becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of the former period being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). And the range from the value after this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter Compared with the range, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low. Then, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is obtained by some method, and the game ball is started upward by irradiating the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 with radio waves. If a fraudulent act is performed as if entering the mouth 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the values of the jackpot determination value range (the jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability is high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is from an intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either the low probability or the high probability. If it is set to the range close to the maximum value side, the initial value update type counter value immediately before the value that becomes the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value becomes zero. A period extending to the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and a period extending from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) And the former period is much more likely to be drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). Of these values, one of the values becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process, and is set in the above-described big hit determination initial value determination random number. Counting up, and then counting up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter Then, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value. Is set to a range close to the initial value update type counter value from the timing when the value becomes 0, the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (low value) The period extending to the time when the probability becomes 32667 and the value 31767) with high probability is irregular and rich in randomness. As a result, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is raised by irradiating the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 with radio waves. Even if an illegal act pretending to have entered the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot determination value ranges (the jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value, as shown in FIGS. 160 and 161. Until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle from the minimum value (first value) of the range from the initial value to the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the fourth cycle from time T1 is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . In this way, in the initial value update type counter, fluctuation is given to the time when the counter to be updated becomes the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity) The player is not perceived by the player).

[14-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage decreases, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. The Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. ms) is set. The determination in step S14 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S14, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e shown in FIG. 97 is operated (step S16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 4100a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S16, a value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S16, the RAM clear is cleared. A value 0 is set in the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and games relating to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc. It is a flag indicating whether or not to erase information, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Following step S18 or step S20, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the liquid crystal control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Following step S22, it is determined whether or not the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S26, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later. Is determined (step S28). If they match, it is determined whether or not the value of the backup flag BK-FLG is a value 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the value of the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as the power recovery (step S32). . In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value 0, and the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, “recovery” is a state where the power is turned on from a state where the power is cut off, a state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure, a high frequency irradiation is detected and reset, It also includes the state of returning after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is deleted, or the checksum value (sum value) matches in step S28. If not, or if the value of the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM Is cleared (step S36). Specifically, the value 0 is written in the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). The big hit determination initial value determination random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determination random number described above is used when the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated to erase the game information or the sum value does not match. Or, when the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and a jackpot determination random number based on the taken out ID code The initial value deriving process for deriving the same fixed value is always executed from the fixed numerical value range of the counter to be updated, and this fixed value is set.

  Following step S36, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S38). In this setting, the initial information is read from the main control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S40). In the RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. Test commands classified into test relations shown in FIG. 123 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, interrupt initialization is performed (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, interrupt permission is set. (Step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, a value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this order in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S46, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is provided as a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110. It is input from. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input in step S48, non-winning random number update processing is performed (step S50). In this non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination, random number for determining initial value for normal symbol determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S50, the process returns to step S46 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S48, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. For example, a non-winning random number update process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. Note that the processing in steps S46 to S50 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the start opening solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoid 2108, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, and the lower special symbol storage display 1187 shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S56). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S56, a value 1 is set in the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[14-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interruption process is repeated at every interruption period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 127 (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 shown in FIG. 95, and the big winning opening shown in FIG. 97, a detection signal from the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball, and an upper start port switch shown in FIG. 97 for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. The detection signal from 3022, the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting the game ball entering the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 95, and the gate part 2350 shown in FIG. 97. A detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 97 for detecting the game ball, and a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. A payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 that indicates that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 97 has successfully received a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later is read and input information is input information. Store in the storage area. Further, a detection signal from an upper start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101 and a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 are read. Then, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 123 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In other words, if there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and if there is a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109, A start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 for detecting the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2103 are shown. , A detection signal from an upper start switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 , And a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 is read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. Each time it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general prize opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are passed from the first to the third time. By performing the reading twice in total, that is, the twice reading to be compared and the twice reading to be compared for the second time to the fourth time, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering or noise. Therefore, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 4110 is normal for various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that it has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, a winning random number update process is performed (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number that is updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Counts up. For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value updating type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value as the minimum value). 0 to the maximum value is updated within the value 32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up within the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by the winning random number update process. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the big hit determination random number. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In this embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determination random number, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number are processed on the main control side power-on processing (main control) shown in FIG. Update processing in step S50 in the main main processing) and the winning random number update processing in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, are updated each time the interrupt timer is generated. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated after the process time becomes uneven. , A big hit determining initial value determining random number, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and a small hit symbol initial value determining random number in step S5 Or as a mechanism to only update the non Toraku random number update processing.

  Subsequent to step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 121 for paying out a game ball based on this input information is created, or the main control board 4100 The self-check command shown in FIG. 121 for confirming the connection state between the board and the payout control board 4110 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2103 shown in FIG. 95, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110. When the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 4110 has completed reception normally is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. To the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 4110 transmits various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. In the frame command reception process in step S82, when these various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 4110 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. . Further, the command normally received as the payer serial data is shaped into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (a variety of commands (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, frame State 2 command))), and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S82, an illegal act detection process is performed (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the game state is not a big hit game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2103), etc. Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 123 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number described above is taken out, and it is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not a gaming state is to be generated (referred to as “special lottery”)), or a counter value for updating the jackpot symbol random number is extracted, and the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not they match (determining whether or not probability fluctuations are generated). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) that is set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) described above, and read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 in the high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S86, the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Is determined depending on whether or not the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the upper start port switch 3022, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, while the lottery results are based on the lower start port switch 2109. 122, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 122 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the upper special symbol display 1185 or according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The lighting signal output to the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is set so that the lower special symbol display 1186 is lit, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Also, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands classified into the big hit relation shown in FIG. Closing display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 95 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2103 is opened from the closed state is two times, Turn on the 2 round indicator lamp 1190a of the round indicator 1190 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the two-round display lamp 1190a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is fifteen times, the 15-round display lamp 1190b of the round indicator 1190 shown in 89 is displayed. The lighting signal output to the 15-round display lamp 1190b is set so as to be lit, and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or to the gaming state display 1183 so that the presence / absence of probability variation is lit in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S86, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is performed (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the counter value for updating the above-described normal random number for determination per symbol is extracted and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as gate information To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece 2106 is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). In the case of performing the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 is in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that a gaming state in which a game ball can be received in the lower start port 2102 is achieved, which is advantageous to the player It becomes a gaming state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. 122 are created and transmitted as transmission information. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above. Store in the output information storage area. For example, when the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol taken out matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect shown in FIG. Is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2106, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the extracted random number for normal symbol determination does not match the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above is used. The variable display pattern is determined, and various commands classified as related to the common figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Store in the storage area.

  Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110, or a big hit game In addition to outputting a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the prize winning opening 2103 and a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2105 that opens and closes the movable piece 2106 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. Various information (game information) signals relating to the game are output to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process which is this routine and shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role production, shown in FIG. Various commands classified into the notification display, various commands classified into the status display, various commands classified into the test-related, and various commands classified into others are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  Subsequent to step S92, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the register is switched (returned) (step S96), and this routine is terminated. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[15. Various control processing of payout control board
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 146. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process of the payout controller, FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process of the payout controller in FIG. 128, and FIG. 130 is the payout controller following FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interruption process, FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball removal switch operation determination process, and FIG. 133 is a rotation chart. FIG. 134 is a flowchart illustrating an example of sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, FIG. 135 is a flowchart illustrating an example of ball stagnation determination processing, and FIG. 136 is a prize. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the process for adding the number of prize balls for a ball. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the stock monitoring process, FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout ball removal determination setting process, and FIG. 140 is a payout. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process, FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball removal setting process, FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball bending action setting process, and FIG. 143 is a retry action monitoring process. 144 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an inconsistency counter reset determination process, FIG. 145 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error release switch operation determination process, and FIG. 146 is a payout operation by ball lending. Signal processing (a), input signal confirmation processing (b) from the CR unit It is to the timing chart.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interruption processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball spot determination processing, award Prize ball stock number addition processing for balls, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, payout ball removal determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball bending operation setting processing, ball removal setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing Inconsistency counter reset determination processing and error release switch operation determination processing will be described. Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, ball rental prize ball number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball removal determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release switch operation determination process are one process of the main operation setting process in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. , Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball edge determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release switch operation determination processing, Prize ball stock addition processing for prize balls, prize ball stock addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring Management and priority in the order of dispensing ball vent determination setting process is set.

[15-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 performs a payout control unit power-on process as shown in FIGS. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU 4120a. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, input / output setting of the I / O port of the payout control MPU 4120a is performed.

  Subsequent to step S502, output of a power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b shown in FIG. 107 (step S504). The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is composed of a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop IC. The voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. In step S504, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22. The power failure clear signal is input to the clear terminal with the logic being LOW via the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120. Thereby, the payout control MPU 4120a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, until the latch state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S504, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S506), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 1 is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

  Subsequent to step S508, the output of the power failure clear signal is stopped at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 (step S510). By stopping the output of the power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the payout control I / O port 4120b and is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal. Thereby, the payout control MPU 4120a can set the D-type flip-flop PIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop PIC22 latches the state where the logic is LOW and is input to the preset terminal PR, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the output terminal 1Q.

  Subsequent to step S510, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated (step S512). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 4100e of the main control board 4100 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated in step S512, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S514). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 4100e is not operated in step S512, the payout A value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, for example, stored in various flags and various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the CR communication information storage area) Flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set) is to be deleted. When not deleted, the value is set to 0. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, a setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM is performed (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the value of the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches a checksum value stored in a payout control unit power-off process (power-off) described later (step S526). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a value 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S530). ). In this setting, in addition to setting a value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 4120a (hereinafter referred to as “the payout control built-in ROM”). The power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the value of the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not the value 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum value does not match in step S526, Alternatively, when the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared. (Step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, interrupt initialization is performed (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, interrupt permission is set (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b as a power failure warning if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input in step S540, it is determined whether or not the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later. The value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed.

  When the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input.

  On the other hand, when the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544). An external WDT clear signal is output to the watchdog timer (external WDT) 4120c (turns ON, step S546). The external WDT 4120c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time. To reset (periodically diagnosing whether the system of the payout control MPU 4120a is out of control).

  Subsequent to step S546, port output processing is performed (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 (a prize ball command and a self-check command shown in FIG. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860c, and the like are stored. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or a payout motor 744 is provided. The number of balls that the payout motor 744 has actually paid out the game balls is used as an award ball number information signal. Error LED (in this embodiment, each time the payout motor 744 pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal plate 784). A display signal is output to the display unit 860c.

  Subsequent to step S548, port input processing is performed (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the error release switch 860a, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, a detection signal from the counting switch 751, a detection signal from the full switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. .

  Following step S550, timer update processing is performed (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball collision determination time and the payout rotation body 748 that are set as the determination conditions when determining whether or not the ball rotation state by the dispensing rotation body 748 shown in FIG. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination is not performed, and the ball removal determination set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 48, a full tank determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the switch 750, the determination condition is used. In addition to performing time management such as the set ball breakage determination time, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 Are set as the determination conditions when determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistently paid out due to inconsistency are repeatedly issued. Time management of mismatch counter reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 1.75 ms. Since the subtraction result is a value of 0, the sphere collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball shortage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 1.75 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0. The ball removal determination time, full tank determination time, ball breakage determination time, and inconsistency counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S552, CR communication processing is performed (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. Determine. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 4120 a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set on the basis of payout information relating to payout (PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set). By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the payout operation should be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 and, when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. are restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. Exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure And it is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls. As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Thus, various signals generated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced. Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the I / O port 4120b. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball removal determination setting process, As an example of setting the error status output to the CR unit 6, pay a rental ball when not communicating with the CR unit 6. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting. As a result, in the CR communication processing, at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is read from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b. Output to the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal can be output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 to inform the CR unit 6 that the payout operation for paying out the ball is impossible. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by the ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless lending request signal from the CR unit 6, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery. In the CR communication process, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal in the port input process of step S550, that is, a pachinko machine. 1 is when the power is turned on, and when the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6, while when the logic is LOW, that is, a pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are connected to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 86. When not electrically connected via the terminal, the output of the payout control I / O port 4120b is set with the logic state of the PRDY signal set to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output from terminal to CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 4110 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 described above is stored based on the input information based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the game balls filled are full, or the number of game balls taken into the supply path 741a of the prize ball device 740 described above based on the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is a predetermined number or more. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls is determined by using the timer interruption period of 1.75 ms and the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous full (1.75 ms before) full ball and out of ball check process, that is, the detection from the full tank switch 550 When the signal changes from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game ball is filled with the state information described above. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the full tank information for notifying the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full is stored in the state information storage area area. To do.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also checked using the timer interruption period 1.75 ms. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned on in the processing, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned off in the previous full (1.75 ms before) and the ball break check processing, that is, the detection from the ball break switch 750 When the signal transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is ON in the full tank and ball break check processing. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is ON, ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is used. When the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is OFF while the information is stored in the state information storage area, the fact that the number of game balls taken into the supply path 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not greater than a predetermined number is notified. The ball break information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 121) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Following step S558, command analysis processing is performed (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, main operation setting processing is performed (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, retry operations are judged, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. To do.

  Following step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860c of the payout control board 4110 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball break information is read from the state information storage area, and when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this ball break information, a corresponding display is made. Data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, command transmission processing is performed (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame are classified into the state display shown in FIG. 123 based on the various information. (State 2 command) is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the piece of ball information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the supply passage 741a of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this piece of ball information, the frame state 1 command And transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S566, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 4120c is stopped (turns OFF, step S568). This clears the external WDT 4120c and prevents the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b from being reset. The external WDT 4120c starts measuring the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S540 again to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If this power failure warning signal has not been input, the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set in step S542. It is determined whether or not the value is 1. When the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the value of the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set in step S544. 0 is set, an external WDT clear signal is output (ON) to the external WDT 4120c in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, timer update processing is performed in step S552, In step S554, CR communication processing is performed. In step S556, a full tank and out of ball check processing is performed. In step S558, command reception processing is performed. In step S560, command analysis processing is performed. In step S562, main operation setting processing is performed. In step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed. In step S566, command transmission processing is performed. In step S568, output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 4120c is stopped (OFF), and steps S540 to S568 are repeated. The processing from step S540 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a ensures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected. Subsequent to step S570, the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop PIC22 of the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b via the payout control I / O port 4120b (step S572). Thereby, the D-type flip-flop PIC22 can release the latched state by outputting the power failure clear signal. Subsequent to step S572, output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is stopped (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped. Subsequent to step S574, the external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 4120c and the output is stopped (ON / OFF, step S576). This clears the external WDT 4120c. Subsequent to step S576, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG. Subsequent to step S578, a value 1 is set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed. Subsequent to step S580, access prohibition to the payout control built-in RAM is set (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected. Following step S582, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 4120c. Therefore, the external WDT 4120c outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control I / O port 4120b to reset it. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 4120a performs this payout control unit power-on process again. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a payout control unit power-on process upon power recovery thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[15-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (1.75 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 128 to 130.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. (Step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, a value 1 is set to the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 1.75 progress flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms. Set to 0 when no 75 ms has elapsed. Subsequent to step S592, the register is switched (returned) (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process. Subsequent to step S594, interrupt permission is set (step S596), and this routine ends.

[15-3. Ball removal switch operation determination process]
Next, the ball removal switch operation determination process will be described. In this ball removal switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98 is operated.

  When the ball removal switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball removal switch 860b is operated as shown in FIG. S600). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S600, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b. When the input information includes a detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the ball removal switch 860b in the input information, it is determined that the ball removal switch 860b is not operated.

  When the ball removal switch 860b is operated in step S600, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S602). The ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to discharge the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 69, and has a value of 1 when the game balls are discharged. When the game ball is not discharged, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S602, the above-described ball removal determination time is set to be valid (step S604), and this routine is terminated. When the ball removal determination time becomes valid, the ball removal determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal switch 860b is not operated in step S600, this routine is finished as it is. Note that the ball removal flag RMV-FLG set in step S602 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

[15-4. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 98 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. (Step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). A history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Following step S610, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit 749a shown in FIG. It is determined that the state has transitioned. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit 749a determines that the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit 749a is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S614). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, and is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S614, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit 749a is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S618). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the rotation angle switch detection history information shift processing in step S614 is performed, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bit. B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← Shifts bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. To do.

  Subsequent to step S618, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and this routine is terminated.

  Thus, each time this rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit 749a is opened. The value of the least significant bit B0 according to the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the non-blocking state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit 749a has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since 1 or the value 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[15-5. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. In this sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 70 is in a fixed position is skipped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed when the payout of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is completed. Thereby, rotation of the rotating shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in a state in which no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether the value of the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is to be performed. When the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed (when not skipped), the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are 0 and the lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the detection slit 749a described above is the light of the rotation angle switch 752 continuously in four timer interruption cycles. It means that the shaft is in a state of transition from the shut-off state to the non-cut-off state. In the occurrence of the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 98 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 of the rotation detection board 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 shown in FIG. Since the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 have play (backlash), the payout rotating body 748 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 is designed to be equivalent to the rotation of about 2 steps of the payout motor 744, in this embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is performed, The detection signal history from the rotation angle switch 752, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 133, and the lower 4 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST Bits B3 to B0, that is, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 generated by the latest four timer interrupt cycles. . As a result, in the four timer interruption cycles, since the dispensing motor 744 rotates four steps, it rotates more than the rotation of the dispensing rotator 748 due to backlash and absorbs the rotation of the dispensing rotator 748 due to backlash. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the dispensing rotator 748 due to backlash, so that the rotational position of the dispensing rotator 748 can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the dispensing motor 744. In the present embodiment, the four timer interruption periods are 7 ms (= 1.75 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the fixed position determination skip flag. A value 1 is set in SKP-FLG (step S636). Accordingly, it is possible to set so that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed (skip). The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748.

  Subsequent to step S636, the skip determination time is set to be valid (step S638), and this routine is terminated. Here, as shown in FIG. 71, the number of detection slits 749a is three, which is the same number as the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and is formed equally on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board 749 (every 120 degrees). Yes. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body 748 of the rotation detection board 749 via the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749 (dispensing rotary body 748) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 744.

  The payout control MPU 4120 a manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744. Specifically, (1) a transient state (referred to as an “edge detection state”) in which the detection slit 749a changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a cutoff state to a non-blocking state, and (2) the detection slit 749a A state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position determined state”), and (3) the detection slit 749a blocks the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocked state. It is managed in three states: a state transitioned to a state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to four step rotation of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits 749a (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board 749, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation. .

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit 749a is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. The time is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 1.75 ms, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms (= 1.75 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the value of the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed, or in step S634. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, this routine is ended as it is. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. Led to. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Further, the wiring (harness) for connecting the payout control board 4110 and the board 754 in the prize ball case 740 in the prize ball apparatus 740 shown in FIG. Cheap.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state of (3) described above, that is, the detection slit 749a is a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is blocked from the non-blocking state. In this state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is not performed. Thereby, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body 748 is increased. Note that the period and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body 748 can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[15-6. Spherical spot detection processing]
Next, the sphere collision determination process will be described. In this sphere collision determination process, it is determined whether or not a sphere collision state has occurred due to the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG.

  When the ball collision determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Subsequent to step S640, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the detection slit 749a rotates. This routine is finished as it is, assuming that the optical axis of the corner switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the state in which the dispensing rotator 748 is rotating and no ball stagnation has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out at step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S642, a sphere is seen. A value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This staking ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a staking state by the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the only operation is not performed, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S644, the ball collision determination time is set to be valid (step S646), and this routine is terminated. When the ball stagnation determination time becomes effective, the sphere sag determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. .

[15-7. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The prize ball stock number addition process includes a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball stock number addition process is performed from the main control board 4100. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. The prize ball stock number adding process for lending is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a lending request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game balls are paid out by the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70, the setting is made so that the number of prize ball stocks for lending is added.

[15-7-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for the prize ball is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. S650). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the received command information is read from the received command information storage area to determine whether the command is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the routine is terminated as it is. If the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the prize ball number PBV corresponding to the prize ball command is determined as a prize ball. Read from the number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Following step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). This award ball stock PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in this embodiment has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). ing. Thereby, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The prize ball number PBV read in step S652 is added to the prize ball stock PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and this routine is terminated. Note that after the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[15-7-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a loan request signal as shown in FIG. (Step S660). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is no ball rental request signal in step S660, the routine is terminated as it is, but when there is a ball rental request signal in step S660, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. (Step S662), the rented ball number RBV is added to the award ball stock number PBS (Step S664), and this routine is finished. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S664, the rent request signal read in step S660 is deleted from the input information storage area. Further, in this embodiment, the winning ball is prioritized (the winning ball and the lending are managed separately), so even if there is a lending request signal, the lending request signal is held. When a prize ball is paid out, a rental ball is paid out. Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout of the rented ball is performed after the prize ball stock PBS reaches the value 0.

[15-8. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. Whether or not the stock monitoring process continues while the player is playing the game in a state where the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 is filled with the stored game balls (stocked state). It is a process to be monitored.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 receives the prize ball stock number PBS from the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. Reading (step S670), it is determined whether or not the read award ball stock number PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

  When the prize ball stock PBS is greater than or equal to the attention threshold TH in step S672, the attention flag CA-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S674), and this routine ends. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking of game balls in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of game balls not paid out (the number of prize ball stocks described above) is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH. Is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value exceeds the alert threshold value TH, and is set to a value of 0 when the alert threshold value TH is not reached.

  On the other hand, if the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to 0 (step S676), and this routine is terminated.

  If the game state is a big hit and the player relaxes and is looking into the performance developed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. The played game ball may not be pulled out by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with game balls, and the game balls accumulate in the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540. When the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock PBS increases to exceed the caution threshold value TH, which is shown in FIG. 53 as a caution effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform a hall clerk of paying attention to the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player that the game ball is to be removed from the lower plate 302, and the player has filled the game ball in the lower plate 302 (the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540). It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the careful threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game as early as possible.

[15-9. Dispensing ball removal judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball removal determination setting process will be described. In the payout ball removal determination setting process, the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19 by the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70, or the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. And the game ball stored in the tank rail 731 is discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ball is squeezed, or such a payout or discharge is not performed. .

  When the payout ball removal determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 rotates from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. The corner switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S680).

  Following step S680, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 70 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the retry error flag RTERR- It is determined whether or not the value of FLG is 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation). When the operation is normal), the value is set to 0.

  If it is determined in step S682 that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. When the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not operating abnormally, whether or not the value of the in-between-sphere flag PBE-FLG is 1 or not. Is determined (step S686). This staking ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a staking state by the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. When the only operation is not performed, the value is set to 0.

  If the value of the ball-picking flag PEB-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0) in step S686, that is, when the ball-pushing operation is not performed, the prize is stored from the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. The ball stock number PBS is read (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is a number of unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 744.

  If the prize ball stock PBS is greater than 0 in step S690, that is, if there are unpaid balls, whether the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 48 is full with the stored game balls. It is determined whether or not (step S692). This determination is made based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check process in step S556 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, full tank information is read from this state information storage area to determine whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls.

  When the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is not full in step S692, the payout setting process described later is performed (step S694), and this routine is terminated. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S692 that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls, this routine is terminated as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball stock PBS is not greater than 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball, whether or not the value of the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1 or not. Is determined (step S696). This ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are to be discharged. The value 1 is set when the game balls are discharged, and the game balls are not discharged. When the value is set to 0. The determination in step S696 is performed based on the determination result in step S600 in the ball removal switch operation determination process shown in FIG. That is, when an operation signal (detection signal) is input from the ball removal switch 860b shown in FIG. 98, a value 1 is set to the ball removal flag RMV-FLG in step S602 in the ball removal switch operation determination process.

  When the value of the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is 1 in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are discharged, a ball removal setting process described later is performed (step S698). ), This routine is terminated. In this ball removal setting process, a ball removal operation for discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 is performed.

  As described above, when the ball removal switch 860b is operated after the power is turned on, the ball removal setting processing is performed in step S698 of the payout ball removal determination setting processing, and the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are processed. Can be discharged. When this discharge is completed, a value 0 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in step S696, that is, when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are not discharged, this routine is performed as it is. finish. As a result, game balls are not paid out or discharged.

  On the other hand, when the value of the sphere engagement flag PBE-FLG is 1 in step S686, that is, when the sphere engagement operation is being performed, a sphere engagement operation setting process described later is performed (step S700), and this routine is ended. . In this ball-balling operation setting process, a ball-balling operation is performed to cancel the ball-balling state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740.

  On the other hand, when the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally performed, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the dispensing motor 744 is set (step). S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S702, an error state output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S704), and this routine is terminated. In step S704, the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, In other words, the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. To do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. In some cases (when the EXS signal is held up), the logic HI is maintained.

[15-9-1. Withdrawal setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 is driven to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 140 (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, it is determined whether the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set ( Step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Following step S714, the winning ball stock number PBS is read from the winning ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and the real ball count PB is read (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. Although the detailed description will be given later, this count is output from the count switch 751 shown in FIG. 70 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. This is performed based on the detection signal. The real ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the real ball count PB is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S720). The actual ball count PB is set to 0 (step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, the value 1 is subtracted from the drive command number DRV (decremented, step S726), and it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  If there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the actual ball count PB is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S730), and this routine is terminated. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, if there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, this routine is ended as it is. In this way, the payout control MPU 4120a decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726, and when there is no detection signal from the count switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, when the real ball count PB is not incremented. Determines that one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. Thereby, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, a retry operation of paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing this retry operation, the possibility of unpaid game balls to the player can be extremely reduced, and a player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented.

[15-9-2. Ball removal setting process]
Next, the ball removal setting process will be described. In this ball removal setting process, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 70 is driven to perform a ball removal operation for discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. It is.

  When the ball removal setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not a ball removal determination time has elapsed (step S740). This determination is made based on the ball removal determination time updated in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball removal determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S740, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball removal determination time has elapsed. During the ball removal determination time, the payout motor 744 performs a ball removal operation. In this ball removal operation, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are discharged.

  When the ball removal determination time has not elapsed in step S740, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to perform the ball removal operation (step S742), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  On the other hand, when the ball removal determination time has elapsed in step S740, stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to end the ball removal operation (step S744). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S744, a value 0 is set in the ball removal flag RMV-FLG (step S746), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the ball removal flag RMV-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 are to be discharged. The value is set to 0 when the game ball is not discharged.

[15-9-3. Spherical motion setting process]
Next, the spherical cornering operation setting process will be described. This ball-balling operation setting process is a process for setting to eliminate the ball-balling state by the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG.

  When the spherical movement operation setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the spherical movement determination time has elapsed as shown in FIG. S750). This determination is made based on the ball collision determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball stagnation determination time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S750 that the ball collision determination time has not elapsed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S752).

  Subsequent to step S752, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the spherical motion is performed. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to be performed (step S756), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout motor 744 is set. The stop of the drive signal to is set (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, as the end of the ball bending operation, the value 0 is set in the ball bending flag PBE-FLG (step S760), and this routine is ended. This staking ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a staking state by the payout rotating body 748 has occurred. It is set to a value of 0 when the movement operation is not performed (end of the ball movement operation).

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S750, stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S762, an error state output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present, the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, The logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. To do. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that, as described above, when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of HI is HI (the EXS signal is held high), the logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, the value “0” is set in a ball-balling flag PBE-FLG as the ball-balling operation ends (step S766), and this routine is finished.

[15-10. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not a retry operation for paying out a game ball that should be paid out is performed normally.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 performs a rotation angle switch from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. The detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S770).

  Following step S770, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the mismatch counter INCC is set. Add 1 (increment, step S774). This inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 shown in FIG. 71 and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751. The number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 are usually equal to each other. 0. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 140, so that the number of game balls actually received and received by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748 by this retry operation is as follows. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to a mismatch with the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 are repeatedly paid. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area is incremented.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. In some cases, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S780 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the value 1 is subtracted from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decremented, step S778).

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, it is determined whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that a game ball that does not fit in due to a retry operation is paid out is about one millionth, and in this embodiment, inconsistency The value 5 is set as the threshold INCTH. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 130, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control built-in RAM when power is restored. Information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC just before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information Can be done. As a result, in the determination in step S780, the game ball payout operation (retry operation) performed by the prize ball device 740, which has been performed until immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, a prize ball It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the device 740 is in a normal state, and it can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780 even during power recovery. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. Even when power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the game ball payout by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, it is indicated that “retry error”. In order to notify, the error information indicator 860c, which is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 4110, sets retry error information for displaying the number “5”, and the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above Is set (stored) (step S782).

  Subsequent to step S782, the value 0 (initial value 0) is set in the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. Note that when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 is operated, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized in response to the occurrence of this external factor. Yes. When the RAM clear switch 4100e is operated, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 97 deletes all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above, and the RAM clear notification command Is output to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Accordingly, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. It has become.

  Subsequent to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S786), and this routine is terminated. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is not performed). It is set to a value of 0 when operating normally).

  The payout control MPU 4120a uses the retry error information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. In step S566, a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100, and display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860c is created in the LED display data creation process in step S564 in the process. The LED display information is stored in the output information storage area, and a drive signal is output to the error LED display 860c based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the process. The number “5” is displayed on the LED display 860c. The main control board 4100 that has received the status command transmits the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 100 has a door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal for causing a plurality of LEDs on the various decoration boards provided in to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). The plurality of LEDs emit light with a predetermined color. As described above, the store clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 to thereby display the number “" on the error LED display 860c mounted on the payout control board 4110. By visually observing that “5” is displayed, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. Thereby, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the store clerk of the hall, etc., confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860c are not notified, the process can be performed very quickly.

  In addition, by intentionally disabling the counting switch 751, the game ball that is received and paid out by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748 is forced to generate the retry operation described above as being difficult to detect, Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 Since the plurality of LEDs emit light, a hall clerk or the like rushes to confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Therefore, damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 can be suppressed to an extremely low level.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor occurs, for example, when the error release switch 860a shown in FIG. 98 is operated. Therefore, even if the error release switch 860a or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC is forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. There is no.

[15-11. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 shown in FIG. This is processing for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC to be calculated.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed (see FIG. 144) ( Step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  If the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the mismatch counter reset determination time is initialized (step S792). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S792, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set in the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794), and this routine is ended. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC calculates the difference between the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. Usually, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748 and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 match, so the value 0 Become. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 140, so that the number of game balls actually received and received by the concave portion 748a of the payout rotating body 748 by this retry operation is as follows. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to a mismatch with the number of balls detected by the count switch 751 are repeatedly paid. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit in due to a retry operation is paid out is about one millionth. Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the game board 4 and a frame body such as the main body frame 3 to which the game board 4 is mounted, and the game board 4 is exchanged (new stand replacement). Since the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70, the driving power for the prize ball device 740 and the control power for the payout control board 4110 are generated. The power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 5 is provided on the frame side as a common function. As described above, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 can determine an abnormal operation as to whether or not the retry operation is repeated by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC. In the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 130, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the shut-off is stored when the power is shut off, while the payout control unit power-on shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 in the time process (setting of the RAM work area when power is restored), the process is started again from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on. Then, when the game board 4 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is switched to a game board 4 'having a different game specification different from the game board 4 and turned on, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the substrate 4110 starts processing again from the mismatch counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 4 ′ attached thereto, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 4 before replacement is inherited as it is. For this reason, when a player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the game board 4 ′ mounted, the probability of 1 / million million happens, and the number of game balls that do not match is generated and the inconsistency counter INCC When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 'and is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation by the payout control MPU 4120a in a short period. There is a risk. That is, in a short period of time after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′, a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. In spite of this, there is a possibility that it is suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation. As described above, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the impression that the replaced game board 4 ′ is new and easily breaks down. May be given to players. The probability of one millionth of a game ball being paid out due to a retry operation being set in the hall is that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the hall's business hours. In this case, it is the same as the probability that one unsuccessful game ball is paid out due to the retry operation, and therefore, in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. With a probability of 1, the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, the value 1 is incremented to the mismatch counter INCC in one week and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 1, and the value 1 is further incremented in the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 2 in 2 weeks. In week, value 1 is further incremented in inconsistency counter INCC, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 3, in value 4 in inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 4, and in week 5 The value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above. That is, after 5 weeks, the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control MPU 4120a determines whether the count switch 751 receives the count in the determination in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, etc. In the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 143, the error LED display 860c, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110, is notified of the number “ Set retry error information to display “5” and within payout control So that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S790 in the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the inconsistency counter INCC to 0, that is, forcibly resetting the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, the inconsistency counter INCC that is generated with the probability of 1 / million million is increased. Invalidated. As a result, there is an error in the retry operation even though the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like have not occurred. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  In addition, by intentionally disabling the counting switch 751, the above-described retry operation is forcibly generated by making it difficult to detect the game ball received by the recess 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and this Even if an illegal act of illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by a retry operation is performed, when the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a short time, as described above, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is When the mismatch threshold value INCTH is exceeded, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that a hall clerk or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. On the other hand, when the count switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not become equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is set every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent action is that the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH and the count switch 751 is intentionally set as described above. Even if the player is repeatedly inactivated for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act can be extremely reduced.

[15-12. Error release switch operation determination process]
Next, the error release switch operation determination process will be described. In this error release switch operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the error release switch 860a shown in FIG. 98 is operated.

  When the error release switch operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the error release switch 860a is operated as shown in FIG. S800). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the error release switch 860a in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the error release switch 860a. When the input information includes a detection signal from the error release switch 860a, it is determined that the error release switch 860a is operated. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the error release switch 860a in the input information, it is determined that the error release switch 860a is not operated.

  When the error release switch 860a is not operated in step S800, this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated in step S800, error flag state confirmation processing is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various types of error information regarding the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 70 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is operating normally), respectively. Since the payout control MPU 4120a is set, it confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1.

  Subsequent to step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this status information setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the status information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (status information) is read from the status information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control section power-on process (payout control section main process) shown in FIG. A status command is created on the basis of the command and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information indicating the fact is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, the command transmission process in step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Thus, a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Retry operation error notification processing is performed to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” 2) Repeatedly flowing from the side speakers 130 and 130 shown in FIG. 21, the upper right speaker 222 shown in FIG. 29, the upper left speaker 262 shown in FIG. 32, and the lower speaker 821 shown in FIG. It informs hall clerk. The store clerk or the like who heard this retry operation error notification announces a malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 70, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Can be confirmed very quickly compared to the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the side speakers 130, 130, the upper right speaker 222, the upper left speaker 262, and the lower speaker 821. In the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red).

  Subsequent to step S804, release setting processing is performed (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the error flag state indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopped or a ball can be lent out by the error LED indicator 860c, which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 4110. In this case, the logic of the above-mentioned PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, a state where it has been started up, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, when the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the error LED indicator 860c has already displayed. In order to forcibly stop the number “5” for informing that the “retry error” is made, the retry error information stored in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is changed to “normal”. Is forcibly overwritten on the information displayed with the graphic “−” informing that it is. In addition, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be lent, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the lending device such as a game ball is connected from the payout control I / O port 4120b. Output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

  Subsequent to step S806, an error flag initialization process is performed (step S808), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, if the error flag status indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value. Set to 0 to initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. As described above, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 143 and the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH, this internal factor In response to the occurrence of the error, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in the process of step S786 of the process. On the other hand, when the error release switch 860a is operated, this is an external factor. In response to the occurrence of the error, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is shown in FIG. 97 when the RAM clear switch 4100e mounted on the main control board 4100 is operated, that is, when the error release switch 860a is operated. Similarly, initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

[15-13. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process in FIG. 130 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount is performed twice) is used as the number of rented balls. The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 19 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. Confirms the logical state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 1.75 ms that is the interrupt timer period.

[15-13-1. Signal processing during payout by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out a rental ball. If the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible is set, as shown in FIG. 146 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to transmit the signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, is raised and held and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and as PRDY via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball To the CR unit 6 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player pushes the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. 17, the ball rental switch 365b is switched on (turned on). The operation signal is input as TDS shown in FIG. 99 from the frequency display board 365 to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. As shown in FIG. 146 (a), the CR unit 6 to which the TDS is inputted pays out the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input to the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRDY signal.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b), the payout control MPU 4120a to which this BRDY signal is input is set to the lending request monitoring time HA (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms, from the timing H1. ) Elapses from the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball, and the predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, and 100 yen as a monetary amount). It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out the payout), rises.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls, FIG. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, and the signal is Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the payout control I / O port 4120b as a BRQ signal.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a, when the BRQ signal rises up from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the BRQ request acknowledge ACK monitoring time HB (in this embodiment, Is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms.) In order to notify that the one-time payout operation has been started, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the payout control I is held in the raised state. / O port 4120b and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input has a lending instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, set to 20 ms to 58 ms) from the timing H3. The BRQ that has been started up and held from timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 146 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) from the timing H4. Then, only the predetermined number of rented balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. When the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while keeping its logic as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and as EXS. It is output to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining number of game balls for 100 yen out of the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as shown in FIG. ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. 869 is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a), and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 4120a pays out the remaining 100 yen of game balls to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 146 (c). Then, the EXS signal that has been started up and held is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b with its logic set to LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and as EXS via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. And output to the CR unit 6 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 146 (a), the CR unit 6 starts from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in this embodiment, the maximum setting is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The raised BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The above-described lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. The time is counted by the timer update process in step S552 in the power-on process (payout control part main process).

  The payout control MPU 4120a does not communicate with the CR unit 6 when a ball breakage, ball rounding, counting switch error, retry error, full tank, etc. occurs (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6). 146 is low, i.e., when it is held in a falling state), as shown in FIG. It is held and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and being held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and paid out. It is output from the control I / O port 4120b, and output as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. “Keep the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. The logical HI is maintained when the EXS signal is held up.

  In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a uses the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money as 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls having the number of lent out balls of 50 are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. A hall clerk or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used for the upper plate 301 or When set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a monetary amount, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as a monetary number When set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount of money five times, and sets the number of game balls of 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of rented balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[15-13-2. Checking input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 is configured such that the CR unit 6 performs BRQ via the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball even when the lending request monitoring time HA has elapsed. When the signal is not started up or when the above-described lending instruction monitoring time HC elapses, the CR unit 6 connects BRDY to the lending device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal board 869, even when the signal has not fallen or when the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. A ball or other lending device connection terminal board 869 is used to output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not started up, or as described above. Even after the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY to the payout control board 4110 from the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball, and the signal is lowered. If not, the above-described PRDY and EXS are used to check whether BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 146 (e) and (f), the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and starts a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment) from this timing J0. , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the signal is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 while maintaining the lowered state as PRDY. Is output to the CR unit 6 through the gaming device lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, it is output from the payout control I / O port 4120b while maintaining the lowered state. Is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J1 after the elapse of a predetermined period JB (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J1 as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of a predetermined period JC from the timing J2 (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) as its logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J3 after the elapse of a predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J3 as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J4 after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4 as the logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state and output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J5 after the elapse of a predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J5 as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the payout control I / O port 4120b, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6).

  The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[16. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receive various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 97 will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 152 and 156 to 159. To do. FIG. 147 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 148 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 149 illustrates an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 150 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, FIG. 151 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, and FIG. 152 is a rotation detection switch history creation process. 156 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the LOCKN signal history creation process, FIG. 157 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the connection failure determination process, and FIG. 158 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the connection recovery process. FIG. 159 shows a sub liquid crystal transformer. Tsu is a timing chart illustrating the timing for outputting the connection confirmation signal to the data IC of INIT terminals.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, rotation detection Switch history creation processing, LOCKN signal history creation processing, connection failure determination processing, and connection recovery processing will be described. The rotation detection switch history creation process is executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process in step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. The connection failure determination process and the connection recovery process are executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110, and the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process described later. The connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process for initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, when the interrupt permission is set. Various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101, effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information that is the content that is backed up to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) 1 ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the production backup information that is backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db is also obtained for the peripheral control SRAM 4150 d shown in FIG. (SRAM) is compared, and production backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM), which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Subsequent to such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a, after performing this initialization setting process, outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 101 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 100 to reset to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is made so that it doesn't take.

  Subsequent to step S1000, a current time information acquisition process is performed (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 4, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the liquid crystal display so that the luminance of the LED included in the acquired luminance setting information is obtained. A process of lighting the apparatus 1900 by adjusting the brightness of the backlight is performed. As described above, the luminance setting information is currently set with luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is included. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Sometimes, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information to light the LED, and the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on at a luminance of 80%, the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not performed. It has become. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the value 0 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the input of the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, it is determined whether or not the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value 1 (step S1008). When the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a value 1. To do. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to output the peripheral control MPU 4150a. To prevent resetting.

  When the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing is performed (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process to be described later is started, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S1010, lamp data output processing is performed (step S1012). In this ramp data output processing, DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 100 is performed. Here, serial transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A game for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on various decoration boards provided on the game board 4 and / or a plurality of decoration LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. The panel-side light emission data SL-DAT is created and set in the ramp data creation process described later. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 designates the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the send buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the ramp data output process, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 100 is performed. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It has been created and set in the creation process. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Following step S1012, operation unit monitoring processing is performed (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (rotation direction) ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The operation of the unit 405 is monitored, and the dial operation unit 401 is rotated. And reflecting the status of the operation of the pushing operation section 405 to the game effects whether appropriately determined.

  Subsequent to step S1014, display data output processing is performed (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation process described later is displayed on the liquid crystal display from the channel CH1 shown in FIG. The data is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 from the device 1900 and / or the channel CH2 shown in FIG. Accordingly, various screens are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used as the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. To cancel the output. This can prevent the processing time from being delayed, but a so-called frame drop occurs, but the various decorative boards provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012. Provided in the speaker 821 and the door frame 5 provided in the main body frame 3 by the production of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with effects produced by music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from the speakers 130, 222, and 262.

  Subsequent to step S1016, sound data output processing is performed (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation processing described later is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data, or the music and sound effects are output. In addition, the sound data of the notification sound or notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5, and the notification sound and notification sound are also stereo. Or played.

  Subsequent to step S1018, scheduler update processing is performed (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  In addition, in the scheduler update processing, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

  In the scheduler update process, the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used from the head drive data. The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, received command analysis processing is performed (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received by a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac are analyzed. The various commands shown in FIG. 122 are classified into various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized as notification display, and status display shown in FIG. There are various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified into others.

  Following step S1022, warning processing is performed (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 123, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The set screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set, are the various control data of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. The data is extracted from the copy area 4150ce and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 shown in FIG. 102 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 shown in FIG. When a problem occurs in the connection with the receiver, a connection recovery process (to be described later) for resolving the problem and recovering the connection is also performed. In the warning process, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a start-up screen at power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or during a period when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is demonstrating in a waiting state. Check whether there is a problem in the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Therefore, as an operation check request of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output board built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 requests the LOCKN signal output For sending data As a response signal, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. On the other hand, if the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 because a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. To that effect, a communication error display process (for example, a notification image (eg, “A sub-liquid crystal display device has failed. Please call a store clerk”) in a connection recovery process, which will be described later, is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. And a notification sound (for example, “sub liquid crystal The display device has a malfunction. ”) Is repeatedly controlled to flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. provided on the door frame 5. At this time, the LED for lighting decoration provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 may be controlled to turn on all the various LEDs (various LEDs that are electrically connected to the various decorative boards via wiring) mounted on the various decorative boards included in 4. ing. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Following step S1024, RCT acquisition information update processing is performed (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The time information stored in the time information storage unit is updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, lamp data creation processing is performed (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and based on the light emission data pointed to by the pointer among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. 95, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 and / or a plurality of decorative LEDs 3400a of the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for output is extracted and created from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 41 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 101 is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. set.

  Subsequent to step S1028, display data creation processing is performed (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is displayed in the peripheral control unit. The data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of 4150 and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data and creates sprite data to generate the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or Alternatively, drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Further, in this display data creation processing, in the connection failure determination processing described later, which is executed as one processing of the warning processing in step S1024, from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 shown in FIG. Based on the history of the output LOCKN signal, the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. When it is determined whether or not there is a problem with the connection, and it is determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, a screen (image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 ) And the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 When the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is controlled so as to generate a screen (image) displayed on the LCD, the screen (image) to be displayed on the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a is controlled so as to generate a composite screen (composite image) to be combined with a screen (image) displayed in the area. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays a screen (image) to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 when there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to generate a composite screen (composite image) to be combined with a screen (image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020 to configure screen generation schedule data. Among the screen data arranged in time series, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts the character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data and displays it on the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Sprite data for one screen (one frame) to be created is created, and sprite data for one screen (one frame) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is created, and based on these sprite data Then, drawing data of the composite screen (composite image) is generated on the built-in VRAM. The generated drawing data of the synthesized screen (synthesized image) is output from the channel CH1 shown in FIG. 102 to the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the built-in sound source VDP 4160a in the display data output process of step S1016 described above. As a result, a composite screen (composite image) is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In the present embodiment, the sprite to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 when the drawing data of the composite screen (composite image) is generated is the sprite displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The priority is set higher than that. Accordingly, even when sprite over occurs when generating the drawing data of the composite screen (composite image), the liquid crystal that is hidden by the sprite to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 and cannot be visually recognized. The sprite displayed in the display area of the display device 1900 only becomes a sprite over, and the sprite to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is generated on the built-in VRAM so as to be surely visible. It has come to be.

  Subsequent to step S1030, sound data creation processing is performed (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, Extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number. In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130, 222, and 262 provided on the door frame 5. In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 and 222 provided on the door frame 5 are used. , 262, but the production sound such as music and sound effects is small, but when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the loud volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) ) Can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and / or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is rendered more powerful, or the gaming state is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that you are likely to migrate.

  Subsequent to step S1032, backup processing is performed (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 101, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1) of the backup first area 4150cb Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to r) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is specified as the request factor of the MA controller 4150ac, and the copy to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is used as Bank0. The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies that the backup second area 4150cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 101, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in backup first area 4150db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150a Is stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM), specifying the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and copying to Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. The contents to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and the Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously, the top address of Bank3 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150dc The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. P2 is specified, and the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) start address to the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) end address is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in a second backup area 4150dc. Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, a value of 0 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1038), and the process returns again to step S1006, and the value 0 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Is set and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds to step S1009. Step S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process of steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”. The peripheral control unit steady process starts with setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010. Step S1012, Step S1014,..., And Step S1036. Finally, in Step S1038, the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, and when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0, the process is completed. Will be. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 can be received is input from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. (Step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). ), This routine is terminated. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the process is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. In step S1009 in the process at the time of input (peripheral control unit steady process), the peripheral control unit V, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed by setting a value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In addition to notifying the blank signal interrupt process, the peripheral control unit steady process is performed by setting the steady process flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. By notifying the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, that the execution has been completed, the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. Is determined to be 0 or not, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. You have me. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 147 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the routine control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33 ms 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, when the occurrence of the 1st timer interrupt for the 33rd time happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 101 is arranged in time series. Of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. And the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral I / O port continuous transmission for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored. Based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, the drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 101 is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf for decorative driving amplifier board side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and via peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c attached externally A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and created. Peripheral control RAM 4 shown in 101 Set to 50c of the motor driving the substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus obtained is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input, thereby history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from the various detection switches. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. For example, the rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like are created, and the operation of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. Set in the unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai.

  Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver IC ICDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 shown in FIG. 117 is created, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak of the peripheral control RAM 4150c attached externally. As described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received by the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 shown in FIG. 117 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey the fact, specifically, a connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal driving board 3425. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak, the frequency of defects between the connection between the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 and the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 and the occurrence state of the defect are acquired to obtain the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. The drawing state of can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc for backup. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up. The production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (in the backup first area 4150 cb) Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The stored contents are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the MA controller 4150ac is designated to be copied to Bank2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) is used as Bank0. The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the second backup area 4150cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the head address of) in the backup second area 4150 cc of bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies the copy to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 4150cc. Shi Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 4150 cc from the content stored at the beginning address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 147, various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are performed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production. In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, and the peripheral control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted. Even in the production lot of the substrate 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 starts to transmit main commands as serial data when various commands from the main control board 4100 are started as main data. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 150 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated to generate noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. The environment is susceptible. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. 101 shows the status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, as shown in FIG. 101, the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Remember. When storing the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is allocated as the received status of the main peripheral serial data as the first byte and the main peripheral serial data as the second byte. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 103 is input via the main control board 4100 will be described. To do. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and a power failure notification signal is input. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sequentially executed by sequentially turning off the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900, turning off the excitation of motors and solenoids provided in the game board 4, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing this, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 101 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and the backup first area 4150cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

  To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb Then, the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are all copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU The contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac by the core 4150aa are transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb. Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa uses the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the data are copied sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc successively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 101 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 100 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can output a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, and when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 147 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal is continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It has become. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with various noises by automatically resetting.

[16-1-6. Rotation detection switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation detection switch history creation process executed as one process of the operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 149 will be described. In the rotation detection switch history creation processing, the history of detection signals from the pair of rotation detection switches 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 shown in FIG. 43 is created.

  When the rotation detection switch history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the RAM 4150c (step S1400). The rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are each 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, “B” is a bit. And a history of detection signals from the rotation detection switch 432a is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, and from the rotation detection switch 432b. The detection signal history is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST.

  Following step S1400, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b (step S1402). This determination is made when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, among the plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c arranged at regular intervals on the driven gear 410 connected to the dial operation unit 401 shown in FIG. While one rotation detection piece determines that the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432a has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the one rotation detection piece rotates. It is determined that the optical axis of the detection switch 432a has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, it is determined that one rotation detection piece is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, while from the rotation detection switch 432b. When there is no detection signal, it is determined that one rotation detection piece has shifted the optical axis of the rotation detection switch 432b from the blocked state to the non-blocked state.

  When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a in step S1402 or when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information is shifted (step S1404). In this rotation detection switch detection history information shift process, when there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST read in step S1400 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5. , B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, while shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 bit by bit, while the rotation detection switch 432b When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400, the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1 , B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, from least significant bit B0 to most significant bit B Shifted by one bit towards the.

  When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1404, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. If shifted, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1406), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a in step S1402, or when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information is shifted (step S1408). In this rotation detection switch detection history information shift process, the same process as the rotation detection switch detection history information shift process in step S1404 is performed. When there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a, the rotation detection read in step S1400. The switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is converted into the least significant bit B0 such that the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. When there is no detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST read in step S1400 is converted to the most significant bit B7 ← B6. B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B ← B1, B1 ← and so that the least significant bit B0, shifted by one bit toward the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  When the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST is shifted in step S1408, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, while the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST is set. If shifted, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST (step S1410), and this routine is terminated.

  Thus, each time this rotation detection switch history creation process is executed, rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can be created.

  Next, the dial operation unit 401 is stopped from the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST described above (in other words, the dial drive motor 414 is out of step). ) A method for determining whether it is rotating clockwise or counterclockwise will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit, and FIG. 154 is the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the rotation detection piece of the driven gear and the pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of FIG. 155, and FIG. 155 (A) shows the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit in the rotation operation unit. FIG. 155 (B) is a list showing ON / OFF of the pair of rotation detection switches accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit. is there.

  As described above, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST and DSW1-HIST are each 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bits B0, “ B "represents a bit.) And the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432a is the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST shown in FIG. Is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection switch 432b is stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c as the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST. It is remembered. Therefore, whether the dial operation unit 401 is in a stopped state (in other words, is the dial drive motor 414 out of step), whether it is rotating in the clockwise direction, or counterclockwise? In the case of determining whether the rotation is in the direction, the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST, DSW1-HIST is read from the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and is consistent with the detection determination value. Depending on whether or not. This detection determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 100, and is copied to various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 101 when the power is turned on. Is read and used. The data preset as the detection determination value is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit).” The upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. ing. That is, this determination is performed based on whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0 to HIST and DSW1 to HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the detection determination value.

  Specifically, when the low-order 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW0-HIST have the value 1, the rotation detection switch 432a is continuously set to the dial operation unit 401 by the occurrence of four 1 ms timer interrupts. Means that the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the rotation detection switch detection history information DSW1-HIST, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are 1, the value is 4 times 1 ms. This means that the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401, following the occurrence of the timer interruption.

  Next, detection of the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 will be described. As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. In FIGS. 153 to 155, the rotation detection switch 432a is described as “A” and the rotation detection switch 432b is described as “B”. Steps 1 to 4 shown below are four types of rotational positions of the dial operation unit 401 with reference to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, respectively. , Step 2, Step 3 and Step 4 are sequentially shifted, and after moving to Step 4, the process returns to Step 1 again.

  When the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, as shown in FIG. 153, the rotation detection switches 432 a and 432 b detect the rotation detection piece 410 c of the driven gear 410 as shown in FIG. The rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c by the shift to step 2 accompanying the clockwise rotation, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b and the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation. The process proceeds to a step where the piece 410c is not detected. Thereafter, due to the shift to step 3 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are rotated detection pieces. The process proceeds to a step where 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The process proceeds to a step in which the rotation detection switch 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 154, as shown in FIG. 154, both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then Due to the shift to step 2 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432a and the rotation detection switch 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The process proceeds to a step in which the detection switch 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c. Thereafter, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to each of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b and the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b detect both rotations. The process proceeds to a step where the piece 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the rotation detection switch 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection switch 432b. Then, the process proceeds to a step where the rotation detection switch 432b does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c.

  That is, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned on (the rotation detection piece 410c is detected) / OFF (the rotation detection piece 410c is not detected). As shown in FIG. 4, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are both “ON” in Step 1, and the rotation detection switch 432a continues to be “ON” in Step 2, while the rotation detection switch 432b is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are “OFF” in Step 3, the rotation detection switch 432a continues to be “OFF” in Step 4, while the rotation detection switch 432b is “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to step 1 again, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned on / off in step 1, as shown in FIG. In step 2, the rotation detection switch 432b continues to be “ON”, while the rotation detection switch 432a is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned “OFF” in Step 3, the rotation detection switch 432b continues to be “OFF” in Step 4, while the rotation detection switch 432a is turned “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to step 1 again, and both the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  Note that when the dial operation unit 401 stops without rotating clockwise or counterclockwise, the detection from the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b does not change. There is no switching of ON / OFF operation by 432a and 432b.

  As described above, the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b can detect the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 based on the ON / OFF in each of the steps 1 to 4 described above. When the dial operation unit 401 is operated by a player's operation, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by detecting the switching of the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b. It is possible to grasp the rotation direction, and to grasp that the dial operation unit 401 is stopped by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are not switched between ON / OFF states. Can do.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a is executing a control that rotates the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise, the player presses the dial operation unit 401 with a finger or palm and presses the dial operation unit 401. When the rotation of 401 is forcibly stopped, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by detecting that the rotation detection switches 432a and 432b are not switched between ON / OFF states. It can be grasped that the dial drive motor 414 that is a stepping motor is out of step.

[16-1-7. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 149 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 shown in FIG. 117 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received by the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 shown in FIG. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey the fact, specifically, a sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and a sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, and least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. ing.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0, the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC 0 determines that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data, and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. And the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, that is, it is determined that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is requested to be transmitted, while the sub liquid crystal When there is no LOCKN signal from the receiver ICSDIC0, the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is not abnormal data (normal data), and the sub liquid crystal transistor Connections between the emitter IC3420a and the sub LCD receiver ICSDIC0, i.e. determines that the predetermined data pattern for checking the connection between the transmitter and the receiver (recovery) of (SYNC pattern) not sending request.

  If there is a LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver IC ICDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0 and so on are shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICICSIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing in step S1504 is performed. When there is no LOCKN signal from the sub-LCD receiver ICSDDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection read in step S1500 is detected. The history information LOCKN-HIST is changed from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. Shift one bit toward the upper bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  Thus, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-8. Connection failure judgment process]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 147 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver IC ICDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100, as shown in FIG. 157, of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 shown in FIG. 117 is stored. . As described above, when the LOCKN signal determines that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 is abnormal data, the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 included in the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 has the following data. This is a signal that is output to convey that effect. Specifically, it is between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, the transmitter. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the receiver and the receiver.

  Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 100. In this embodiment, it is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the liquid crystal output board 3420 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This routine ends.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the liquid crystal output board 3420. It is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided for the sub liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided for the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. (Count the cumulative number of times). Note that the communication check counter CC-CNT is reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and is set to 0, but is not reset by an instantaneous power failure or a power failure. The power is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT just before the moment or power failure occurs during power transmission.

  Subsequent to step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S 1526, that is, the cumulative number determined as a state in which a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a value of 1 is set in the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. This flag indicates whether or not a failure has occurred. Value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. A failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state is not reaching the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. Note that the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and is reset with a value of 0. It is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure occurs during power transmission.

[16-1-9. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 147 will be described. In this connection recovery process, the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. In order to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output, and when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal, the fact is notified To do.

  When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 147 in the peripheral control unit steady process as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process in step S1020, it is determined whether the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of the screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule is When the presentation is completed along with the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, is the period during which the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or a period during which the liquid crystal display device 1900 is demonstrating in a customer waiting state? Can be determined based on the screen generation schedule data, the period during which the start-up screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, When the period is during the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the process proceeds to step S1542 to be described later, while the startup screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, A liquid crystal display device 1900 is demonstrating while waiting for customers. If not during the (mere is when the standby state of plying) so as to terminate the routine.

  When the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is finished as it is, while in step S1540, the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the presentation is completed and the updating of all the pointers is completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step) S1542). This communication check counter CC-CNT, as described above, every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 157 is executed, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 in the determination of step S1522 in the same process. And the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425, that is, the number of times determined to be a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is counted up (cumulative number). Counting). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state where a failure has occurred is even one.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S 1542, that is, when the number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is not once, this is left as it is. While the routine is finished, the number of times when it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, This flag indicates whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the receiver and the value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420, whereby the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and is output to the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0. The sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal transmitter The connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is recovered.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine is finished. In this communication error display process, drawing is performed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 in order to notify that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Process. For example, a message “A sub-liquid crystal display device has failed. Please call a clerk” is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, in the communication error display process, during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or during the period when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is demonstrating in the customer waiting state. Whether there is a problem in the connection between the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. As a request for confirming the operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the liquid crystal output board serial I / O port built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 receives the LOCKN signal. Sending output request data As a response signal, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When this LOCKN signal is not input, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3450 assumes that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a defect has occurred, and a notification image (for example, “A defect has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. And a process in which a notification sound (for example, “a defect has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device”) repeatedly flows from the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like provided on the door frame 5 is performed. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 5 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 (various LEDs electrically connected to the various decorative boards via wiring) are turned on. Processing may be performed.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 shown in FIG. 102 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 will be briefly described. Peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Or the like, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and the main control side main process of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 126 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the upper start opening 2101 shown in FIG. 95 by the main control side timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 127, or the lower start opening 2102 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game balls is “big hit”, the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 2103 shown in FIG. 95 is one round. Up to 15 rounds, up to 15 rounds. In each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game ball enters the grand prize opening 2103, and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9). Then, the round is digested, and every time one game ball enters the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

  The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls to the upper start port 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls to the lower start port 2102 is used as a command from the main control board 4100. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, whereby the decorative pattern 1900a is displayed on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative pattern 1900b is displayed on the center, and the right side. Is displayed so that the player can recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result after the predetermined time has elapsed and the display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is stopped. At this time, the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. 91 or the lower special symbol display Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by 186 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are variably displayed, the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized. Is displayed from the upper center of the display area toward the lower center, and the decorative pattern 1900c is variably displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are in an opaque state so that it becomes difficult to visually recognize a background image at a position corresponding to the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is displayed in the upper special symbol display unit 1185 or the lower special symbol display unit 1186 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c that are started and stopped in the display area of the device 1900 are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 has the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball in the upper start port 2101 or the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball in the lower start port 2102. When a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 that conveys the result, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is controlled based on the received command, and as shown in FIG. 159, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. When the variation display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started in the display area (timing K0), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 101 is set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the pointer is updated to indicate what screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a. That is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the production progresses along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is active and the screen generation schedule data is active. During the period of time, that is, until the display of variation of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started and stopped, the warning in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In this process, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. Is determined in step S1540 in the recovery process, it has become directly as to end the routine forces.

  Thus, even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c to the stop display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. That is, there is a problem between the connections (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425. Even when the number of times determined to be in the state is even once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. Communication in step S1548 in the connection recovery process For example, the message “There is a problem with the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk” is not displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data is invalidated. An image is displayed based on the received drawing data.

  When the variation display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started and stopped in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (timing K1), the steps in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of S1020, the presentation is completed along with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated and the screen generation schedule data is not activated, the steps in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. One process of warning processing in S1024 158 executed in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 158, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process. When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. If the number of times that it is determined that there is a problem with the connection of the terminal is not once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. If the number of times determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between them is even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and when the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0, In other words, it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble. When the number of times does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a value. When it is not 0 (value 1), that is, when there is a certain failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, and the communication error display process described above is performed. Exit. In other words, while the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The cumulative number of times that it is determined that there is a fault in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even when the fault has occurred in the connection is the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT. If not, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed, so that the process of restoring the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. The connection between the receiver and the receiver When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state where the occurrence of the error has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed), By performing the error display process without fail, for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a message “A problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Thus, the LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data is validated.

  The display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in an interval period until the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started and stopped, and the display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started again. Since the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed in the area, as described above, the LOCKN from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data. In the case where the signal is validated and there is a failure in the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once. And receiver When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that there is a problem with the connection of the sub-liquid crystal has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed, so that the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub-liquid crystal While performing processing to recover the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the cumulative number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has been reached (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed), by performing the communication error display process, for example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 In the display area, “A sub LCD display has failed. Please call a clerk.” It is adapted to perform a process for notifying to display the cormorant message.

  When the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started again (timing K2), since the screen generation schedule data is activated as described above, the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed (timing K3). In the meantime, even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425. SYNC pattern in step S1546 in the connection recovery process even if the number of times determined that there is a problem between the connections (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is even once. Without output processing, the transmitter and receiver The connection error recovery process is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a sub-liquid crystal display device has a problem. "Please call the store clerk" message is not displayed, so the LOCKN signal from the sub LCD receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data is displayed. In addition to the invalidation, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a by the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0.

  As described above, the sub liquid crystal is displayed in the interval period until the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started and stopped in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 until the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started again. While the LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data is validated, the display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. During the period from the start to the stop display, the LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data is invalidated. Yes. In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the combination result of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c being stopped and displayed is the information most interesting to the player, and a big hit gaming state in which a profit is given to the player occurs. Since the player can determine whether or not the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are variably displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display is displayed until the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed. Even if the image of the effect rendered in the display area of the device 3450 is disturbed due to the influence of noise or the like and cannot be rendered correctly, the rendering is not interrupted and the process of recovering to the state in which rendering can be performed correctly is not performed. The decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the player can The information of interest is to complete the drawing.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 is in a period during which the startup screen when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or in a customer waiting state. During the period of demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the built-in serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output board to the differential circuit 3420d of the liquid crystal output board 3420. Yes. This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during a period when the startup screen when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or during a period when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is demonstrating in a customer waiting state. The sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 are transmitted from the serial I / O port for liquid crystal output board incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output board incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 3420d. As described above, the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differencing circuit 3420d are input to the forced switching circuit 3420c. The forced switching circuit 3420c is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 3420d. Two signals are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 through the sub liquid crystal relay board 3422. When the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDDIC0 of the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output substrate, the LOCKN signal output request is originally generated. As described above, since the data format is different from that of the signal output from the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, the data is determined to be abnormal data, and the LOCKN signal is output from the sub-liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 and the liquid crystal output. The data is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the substrate 3420. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not defective when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no failure has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there has been a failure in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. The notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is transmitted through the liquid crystal output board 3420 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Information output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 and notification to that effect (For example, “a malfunction has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device”) is output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. provided on the door frame 5 by controlling the built-in sound source VDP 4160a and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. A notification sound flows. Thus, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. provided on the door frame 5. . At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 5 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 (various LEDs electrically connected to the various decorative boards via wiring) are turned on. May be.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, from the built-in serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output board, the forcible switching circuit 3420c causes the LOCKN signal output request data. Is connected to the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 so that the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 having received the LOCKN signal output request data receives the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal and the peripheral control MPU4150a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it is determined that there is no problem in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 because there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While it is Rukoto, it can be determined that when the LOCKN signal is not input trouble in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is generated as a failure in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that a problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 158 as a notification process. ing. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a finds a malfunction of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the hall by executing the notification process. A store clerk or the like can very easily check whether or not a problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 before the player plays a game, and the check does not take time. Therefore, the trouble of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can be found without trouble.

  In addition, as described above, when the LOCKN signal determines that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 is abnormal data, the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal driving board 3425 has abnormal data. , A signal output to convey that effect, specifically, between the connections between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, Since it is a signal that is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 is transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. Sent When the image cannot be normally received, the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the peripheral in order to inform that the received drawing data becomes abnormal data due to a communication failure between the image communication between the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. The information can be output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the control unit 4150. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a to the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 is started. By outputting the data, the communication trouble between the image communication can be solved. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can detect a malfunction of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 due to a communication malfunction between image communications at an early stage and can work on the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a so as to eliminate the malfunction. Yes. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by discovering and solving the problem of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450.

  Furthermore, the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and outputs the image to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 cannot receive the image transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a normally. A LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal indicating that a communication failure has occurred between image communications between the receiver ICSDIC0 and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a, is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 which is an effect control microprocessor. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 to convey that a communication failure has occurred. A message MGA of “A problem has occurred in the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk” in FIG. 162 (c) is generated, and the generated image is displayed below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. And can be notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a discovers a failure of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 due to a communication failure between image communications at an early stage, notifies the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and notifies that game. Can notify the hall clerk, etc., or directly notify the hall clerk who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the hall clerk etc. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by detecting and solving the problem of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 at an early stage.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 includes a sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and a sub liquid crystal receiver included in the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 in the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. A state in which there is a failure in the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, a connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and a state in which a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver When the accumulated number of times determined to be not reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication troubles between image communications is used for the sub liquid crystal Sub liquid from transmitter IC 3420a The connection confirmation signal informing of the start of transmission to use the receiver ICSDIC0 the sub LCD transmitter IC3420a, until the cumulative number reaches the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, and is capable to continue to repeatedly output. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. Since the connection confirmation signal can be continuously output only during the period in which the game is not stopped and the game is not being executed, the communication failure can be solved.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 includes a sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 and a sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 in the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. When there is a fault in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a fault in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication troubles between image communications is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal transmitter. Sub liquid crystal from IC3420a When the connection confirmation signal informing the receiver ICSDIC0 that transmission is to be started is repeatedly output to the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the main control board 4100 When the control MPU 4100a starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 and starts executing the game again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped. When the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a is stopped and no connection confirmation signal is input, the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a stops transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0. The sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 And it is capable of outputting an image built VDP4160a generates the sub LCD receiver ICSDIC0. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a problem resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move toward a direction in which the communication problem is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186, and stops the display. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period of not being executed, the main control board 4100 Even if the control MPU 4100a starts to fluctuate the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 and starts executing the game again, the display on the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 Each time the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts executing the game again and ends (the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period)) ) In the direction of elimination.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which various images are displayed in a display area of an image display device such as the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, so that the player can enjoy the effects unfolded in the display region. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-30058 (FIGS. 18-24)). By the way, in the image display device in the gaming machine described in this document 1, for example, an effect with a high expectation that a big hit gaming state that gives a profit to the player is generated in the display area of the image display device. At this time, a problem occurs in the image display device for some reason, and this effect is distorted and displayed, resulting in a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

  In addition, a gaming machine has been proposed in which various images are displayed in the display area of the special symbol display device, which is the first display means, so that the player can enjoy the effects unfolded in this display area (for example, No. 2011-240151 (paragraphs [0044], [0050] and FIGS. 10 to 12). In the door frame of the gaming machine described in this document, a sub display device as a second display means is arranged at the lower left position of the upper tray, and a predetermined situation relating to game information is displayed in the display area of the sub display device. Has been. By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, since a predetermined situation related to game information is displayed in the display area of the sub display device, if a problem occurs in the sub display device, it is displayed in the display area of the sub display device. If the displayed image is disturbed, it is difficult for the player to understand the displayed content, and there is a risk that the willingness to play will be reduced.

  Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which various images are displayed in the display area of the special symbol display device, which is the first display means, so that the player can enjoy the effects unfolded in this display area (for example, No. 2011-240151 (paragraphs [0044], [0050] and FIGS. 10 to 12). In the door frame of the gaming machine described in this document, a sub display device as a second display means is arranged at the lower left position of the upper tray, and a predetermined situation relating to game information is displayed in the display area of the sub display device. Has been. However, in the gaming machine described in this document, since a predetermined situation related to game information is displayed in the display area of the sub display device, if a problem occurs in the sub display device, it is displayed in the display area of the sub display device. If the displayed image is distorted, it may be difficult for the player to understand the displayed content and the player's willingness to play may be reduced. In addition, it is necessary to check whether or not a problem has occurred in the sub display device.

[17. Direction]
Next, an effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95 will be briefly described. Here, in the process of step S1530 in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 157, the value 1 is set in the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG, so that the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420, and the sub liquid crystal When there is a problem with the connection between the sub-LCD receiver ICSDDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 3425, that is, with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the game board 4 shown in FIG. The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 included in the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 cannot be used due to a problem, and an effect unfolded in the display region of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is displayed in part of the display region of the liquid crystal display device 1900. An effect performed by substituting an area will be briefly described.

  The effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed by the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. FIG. 162 shows an example of the effect. FIG. 95 shows the main control side main process of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 126 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the upper start opening 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the lower start opening 2102 shown in FIG. Then, the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing operation of the grand prize winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 95 is 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds. When a game ball enters the big prize opening 2103 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine balls), the round is digested. Each time 3 game ball is 1 ball entering the sphere, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) game ball is adapted to be paid out.

  The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls to the upper start port 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls to the lower start port 2102 is used as a command from the main control board 4100. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative design 1900a, The center of the decorative symbol 1900b is displayed in the center and the decorative symbol 1900c is displayed on the right. At this time, the player can recognize the upper special symbol display of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed at 185 or below the special symbol display device 1186 it is made to be able to check the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are variably displayed, the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the decorative symbol 1900a is displayed from the upper left to the lower left of the display area. Is displayed variably from the upper center of the display area toward the lower center, and the decorative pattern 1900c is variably displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. Yes.

  The decorative display of the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative symbols 1900a and 1900c is stopped at the same decorative symbol, and when reach is formed, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. A rectangular substitute display area 1900e is formed in the right area, and an effect displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 that cannot be used due to a malfunction is displayed in the substitute display area 1900e. In this reach effect, if there is no malfunction in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450, the character CHR displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 jumps from the bent posture toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In conjunction with this, the effect that the character CHR displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 jumps out of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and lands is executed.

  When the reach is formed, the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c disappear from the display area of the liquid crystal display area 1900, and the substitute display area 1900e formed on the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed in FIG. 162 (b). As shown, the character CHR is displayed. The character CHR jumps from a bent posture, jumps over the substitute display area 1900e, and jumps to the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to land. When the character CHR jumps over the substitute display area 1900e, the display of the substitute display area 1900e disappears from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so that the player pays attention to the trajectory on which the character CHR jumps.

  When the character CHR is landed, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed so that the background images at positions corresponding to the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are difficult to visually recognize. 1900c becomes opaque, and a message MGA “A sub-liquid crystal display device has failed. Please call a store clerk” is displayed below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Yes. This message MGA is displayed when the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 when a problem occurs in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 and it cannot be used. When the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c start to fluctuate, they disappear from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub-liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 are reliably connected, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is surely defective. When such a failure occurs, the failure occurs in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 3400 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. 95, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 cannot be used. An effect unfolded in the display area is executed by substituting a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Specifically, as described above, in the connection failure determination process of FIG. 157 executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. The sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 provided on the basis of the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is surely defective. When the determination is made, the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. In the display data creation process of step S1030 in the control unit steady process, the screen (image) to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is combined with the screen (image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the scheduler update processing in step S1020, the pointer is updated so as to generate the composite screen (composite image) to be generated, and the screen indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data The data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts the character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data and displays it on the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Sprite data for one screen (one frame) to be created is created, and sprite data for one screen (one frame) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is created, and based on these sprite data Thus, the drawing data of the composite screen (composite image) shown in FIG. 162 (b) is generated on the built-in VRAM. The generated drawing data of the synthesized screen (synthesized image) is generated by the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source in the display data output process of step S1016 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. The data is output from the CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Thereby, the composite screen (composite image) shown in FIG. 162B is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  As described above, the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and outputs the image to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 cannot receive the image transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a normally. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150, which is an effect control microprocessor, transmits a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between image communications between the liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. Since the peripheral control MPU 4150a to which the LOCKN signal is input, the screen (image) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 can be output. When the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is controlled so as to generate the screen (image) to be displayed, the screen (image) to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is displayed as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled so as to generate a composite screen (composite image) to be combined with the screen (image) displayed on the screen. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a finds a failure in the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 due to a communication failure between image communications, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays a screen (image) to be displayed in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 on the liquid crystal display device 1900. By controlling the built-in sound source VDP 4160a so as to generate a composite screen (composite image) to be combined with a screen (image) displayed in the display region, the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 has a defect in the display region due to a malfunction of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Even when the screen (image) cannot be displayed, the screen (image) to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is combined with the screen (image) displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. And it is capable to prevent the screen should appear in area (image) is no longer provided to the player by the failure of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which two liquid crystal displays are provided at approximately the center position of the gaming area of the gaming board (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 1)). In the gaming machine described in this document, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in accordance with the execution of the special figure game on the display units of the two liquid crystal display units, and the display result is derived in accordance with the derivation of the result of the special figure game. It is like that. However, of the two liquid crystal display panels in the gaming machine described in this document, if a problem occurs in one liquid crystal display panel and the effect display cannot be performed, the effect display by the two liquid crystal display panels is performed. There is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced due to the inability to play.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 4100 in FIG. 97, the peripheral control board 4140 in FIG. 97, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 in FIG. 95 are provided. The main control board 4100 enters the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 of FIG. 95 where the game balls launched by the ball striking device 650 toward the game area 1100 defined in the game board 4 are the start areas. The main control MPU 4100a of FIG. 97, which is a game control microprocessor that advances the game based on the above, is mounted. The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the game ball entering the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 in FIG. In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S86 in the process, a special lottery is performed, and the control commands which are various commands in FIG. 122 and FIG. It is output in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the timer interrupt process. The peripheral control board 4140 is a plurality of decorative boards in FIG. 120 that emit various LEDs electrically connected to the various decorative boards in FIG. 120 based on a control command transmitted from the main control board 4100. The peripheral control unit 4150, which is an effect control microprocessor that controls the progress of the effect by transmitting control signals composed of the game board light emission data SL-DAT and the game board light emission clock signal SL-CLK to various decorative boards. A peripheral control MPU 4150a is mounted.

  The subsequent various decorative boards, which are a plurality of decorative boards, are electrically connected by wiring in a daisy chain from the first stage decorative board 5000 to the final stage decorative board 5010 shown in FIG. Based on the content (address) of the address data included in the game board side light emission data SL-DAT, it is determined whether or not it is data for itself (the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is data for itself), At least, a noise removal circuit, an input connector which is an input / output interface unit, and an output connector are provided. The noise removal circuit removes noise from the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The input / output of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK is shared by the input connector and the output connector from the first stage decoration board 5000 to the last stage decoration board 5010. When a defect occurs in one of the plurality of decorative substrates and it becomes difficult to use the decorative substrate, the first decorative substrate 5000 to the final decorative substrate 5010 are excluded except for the one decorative substrate. The order of the decorative substrates can be arbitrarily rearranged so as to be connected in a row.

  For example, in a case where a defect occurs in one decoration board among the decoration board 5000 in the first stage to the decoration board 5010 in the last stage, it is difficult to use the decoration board in one stage. By electrically connecting the board and the decoration board immediately after the one decoration board with the spare wiring, the length of the spare wiring is the output connector of the decoration board immediately before the one decoration board. The length of the wiring for electrically connecting the input connector of one decorative board, and the wiring for electrically connecting the output connector of one decorative board and the input connector of the decorative board immediately after the one decorative board Even if the length of the spare wiring becomes longer than the length of the spare circuit, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game are provided by the noise removal circuit provided on the decoration board immediately after the one decoration board. Panel-side light emission clock signal SL- It is possible to remove the noise from LK.

  As described above, a plurality of decorative boards are electrically connected in a daisy chain from the first-stage decorative board 5000 to the final-stage decorative board 5010, and from the first-stage decorative board 5000 to the final-stage decorative board 5010. The input and output of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK are shared by an input connector and an output connector which are input / output interface units, and one of the decoration boards When it becomes difficult to use due to a defect in the substrate, the decorative substrate is connected so that the first decorative substrate 5000 is connected to the final decorative substrate 5010, except for one decorative substrate. Can be arbitrarily rearranged, so that from the first decorative board 5000 to the final decorative board 5010. If for some reason it becomes difficult to use one decorative board, it is difficult to use the game without going through the one decorative board that has become difficult to use. The board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK are output to the output connector of the decoration board immediately before the one decoration board and the input connector of the decoration board after the one decoration board. And can be electrically connected. At this time, the spare wiring, the wiring for electrically connecting the output connector of the decoration board immediately before the one decoration board and the input connector of the one decoration board, the output connector of the one decoration board and the one decoration Comparing with the wiring that electrically connects the input connector of the decorative board immediately after the board, the length of the spare wiring becomes longer and the spare wiring is more susceptible to noise. Since each of the decorative boards has a noise removal circuit, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK are provided by the noise removal circuit provided in the decoration board immediately after the one decoration board. Noise can be removed. The plurality of decorative boards are data for themselves based on the content (address) of address data included in the game board side light emission data SL-DAT, which is identification information (the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is data for itself). Therefore, the hall clerk etc. removes one decorative board that has become difficult to use due to a problem, so that the one before the one decorative board is removed. Even if the output connector of the decorative board and the input connector of the decorative board immediately after the one decorative board are electrically connected with the spare wiring, the correspondence relationship between the various LEDs that each of the multiple decorative boards emits light is lost. Nothing happens. By such an emergency measure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be operated until a repair person from the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 arrives at the hall. Therefore, it is possible to operate until a repair person in charge of the manufacturer arrives by taking an emergency measure against the occurrence of a problem.

  In addition, in a case where a defect occurs in one decoration board among the decoration board 5000 in the first stage to the decoration board 5010 in the last stage, it is difficult to use the decoration board in one stage. By electrically connecting the board and the decoration board immediately after the one decoration board with the spare wiring, the length of the spare wiring is the output connector of the decoration board immediately before the one decoration board. The length of the wiring for electrically connecting the input connector of one decorative board, and the wiring for electrically connecting the output connector of one decorative board and the input connector of the decorative board immediately after the one decorative board Even if the length of the spare wiring becomes longer than the length of the spare circuit, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT and the game are provided by the noise removal circuit provided on the decoration board immediately after the one decoration board. Panel-side light emission clock signal SL-C And it is capable of removing noise from K. The length of the spare wiring is set in advance so as to straddle one decorative board, and is stored in a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board 4. Thereby, since the length of the spare wiring is set in advance to a length that can straddle one decorative board, a plurality of spare wirings can be accommodated without being bulky at a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board 4. The hall clerk or the like takes out the spare wiring from a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board 4 when a trouble occurs in one decorative board for some reason and it becomes difficult to use it. Promptly perform wiring work (first aid) to electrically connect the output connector of the previous light emission control means and the input connector of the decorative board immediately after the one decorative board with a preliminary wiring. Can do.

[18. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the LOCKN signal output request data is generated by the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the period when the startup screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or in the customer waiting state. During the demonstration period, it was transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output board built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It may be transmitted when the cumulative number of times the SYNC pattern output process is executed in step S1546 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 158 reaches a predetermined number. In the SYNC pattern output process, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420, whereby the sub liquid crystal output board 3420 provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 is provided. The transmitter IC 3420a outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and is output to the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0. The sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a and the sub liquid crystal transmitter The connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is recovered. For this reason, if the SYNC pattern output process is repeatedly executed, some trouble may occur in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Therefore, in order to check whether the device called the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 is functioning normally, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal output board built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and this LOCKN If the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that has received the signal output request data outputs a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a response signal, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the device called the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 is functioning normally. Can do. At this time, in the communication error display process executed in step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 158, for example, as a notification image, “There is a problem with the sub liquid crystal display device. Please call a store clerk. The receiver IC is not defective. ”) May be controlled to be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In the embodiment described above, in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 157, the presence / absence of the LOCKN signal is determined based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, but the connection failure determination process is executed. Each time, it may be directly determined whether or not the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is input. FIG. 163 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of a connection failure determination process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal, and FIG. 163 (b) is an example of the connection recovery process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal. It is a flowchart to show.

  The connection failure determination process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal shown in FIG. 163 (a) is a connection failure in which the presence / absence of the input of the LOCKN signal is determined based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. It is a flowchart similar to the determination process, and the step number in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. Here, different points will be described in detail. When the connection failure determination process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 illustrated in FIG. 100 performs the sub liquid crystal driving substrate 3425 as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 provided in Step S1522. In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0, the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC 0 determines that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is abnormal data, and the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a. And the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0, that is, it is determined that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is requested to be transmitted, while the sub liquid crystal When there is no LOCKN signal from the receiver ICSDIC0, the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a is not abnormal data (normal data), and the sub liquid crystal transistor Connections between the emitter IC3420a and the sub LCD receiver ICSDIC0, i.e. determines that the predetermined data pattern for checking the connection between the transmitter and the receiver (recovery) of (SYNC pattern) not sending request. If there is a LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1522, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 1 in step S1528, and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1522, the LOCKN signal from the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 is terminated. When there is no signal, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 in step S1530, and this routine is terminated.

  Here, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The value is set to 1 when the connection is in a trouble state, and the value is set to 0 when there is no trouble. Note that the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and is reset with a value of 0. It is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure occurs during power transmission.

  The connection recovery process executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal shown in FIG. 163 (b) is based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. 158 is a flowchart similar to the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 158 executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process for determining whether or not there is an input, and the processing for performing the same process is the step in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. Numbered. Here, different points will be described in detail. When the connection recovery process is started following the connection failure determination process in the case of directly determining the input of the LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 is as shown in FIG. 163 (b). When the production is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while in step S1540, the screen generation schedule data is changed. When the presentation is completed and all the pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined in step S1544 whether or not the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0. To do.

  Here, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is, as described above, between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, the transmitter. It is set to a value of 1 when there is a problem with the connection with the receiver, and a value of 0 when there is no problem.

  When the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 (that is, the transmitter). If no fault has occurred in the connection between the receiver and the receiver), this routine is terminated as it is, while if the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1544, the liquid crystal If there is a problem between the connections between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) Up at S1548 It performs the communication error display processing, and the routine is terminated.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 157, the presence / absence of the LOCKN signal is determined based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, but the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN is determined. -The number of times that the LOCKN signal is input (cumulative number) every time the connection failure determination process is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the HIST It may be determined whether or not the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT has been reached. FIG. 164 shows that the LOCKN signal is input every time this process is executed within a predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the connection malfunction determination process in the case of determining whether the frequency | count (accumulation frequency) performed reached the accumulation frequency upper limit CC-LMT.

  Based on the LOCKN signal detection history information shown in FIG. 164, it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input every time this process is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input. The connection failure determination processing when determining whether or not the number of times (cumulative number) has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT is based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. It is a flowchart similar to the connection failure determination process for determining the presence / absence of input, and the processing for performing the same process is given a step number in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. Here, different points will be described in detail. The number of times (accumulated number of times) that the LOCKN signal is input every time this process is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information. ) Starts the connection failure determination process in the case where it is determined whether or not the cumulative number upper limit value has been reached, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the flag M-FLG is a value 1 (step S1515). This monitoring flag M-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a LOCKN signal has been input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information in the previous connection failure determination process, which is the main routine, and when it is determined that a LOCKN signal has been input. When it is determined that the value 1 and the LOCKN signal are not input, the value 0 is set. When the monitoring flag M-FLG is 1 in step S1515, that is, when it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information in the previous connection failure determination processing which is this routine, the monitoring timer counter Add 1 to MT-CNT (increment, step S1517). This monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is a counter that is counted up every time this routine (this process) is executed since it is determined that there is an input of the LOCKN signal. 147, which is executed as a warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 147, and this peripheral control steady process is repeatedly executed every 16 ms. A value obtained by multiplying the value of −CNT by 16 ms is an elapsed time from when it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input.

  Subsequent to step S1517 or when the monitoring flag M-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S1515, that is, in the previous connection failure determination process which is this routine, the LOCKN signal is detected based on the LOCKN signal detection history information. When it is determined that there is no input, in step S1520, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. In step S1522, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value, a value 1 is set in the monitoring flag M-FLG (step S1523), and the liquid crystal output board 3420 is set in step S1524. It is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (incremented), and it is determined whether or not the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is within the predetermined period MT-SPN (step S1525).

  When the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is within the predetermined period MT-SPN, it is determined in step S1526 whether or not the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. . When the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the cumulative number that is determined to be in a state where the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 in step S1528, and this routine is terminated, while the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. In other words, when the cumulative number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value in step S1530. 1 is set, and a value 0 is set to the monitoring flag M-FLG (step S1532). It sets the value 0 to the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT (step S1534), and terminates this routine.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 157, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT that is determined to be in a state where the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. Is a flag indicating whether or not the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed, and the value is 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed. Is set to a value of 0 when the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem with the connection between the receiver and the receiver does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. Note that the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and is reset with a value of 0. It is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure occurs during power transmission.

  In step S1532, the monitoring flag M-FLG is set to 0, and in step S1534, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set to 0, so that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Whether the number of times that the LOCKN signal is input (cumulative number) has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT each time this process is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN It is possible to repeatedly determine whether or not. As a result, this processing is executed even when the cumulative number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state of failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. Each time, it is possible to monitor again whether or not the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has failed.

  On the other hand, if the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 does not match the connection confirmation determination value in step S1522, the monitoring flag M-FLG is set to 0 (step S1536), and the monitoring timer counter is set. A value 0 is set in MT-CNT (step S1538), and this routine is terminated. When the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1525 is not within the predetermined period MT-SPN, that is, the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set to the predetermined period MT-SPN. Even when it exceeds, the value 0 is set to the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1538, and this routine is finished. The monitoring flag M-FLG is set to 0 in step S1536, and the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set to 0 in step S1538. It is possible to monitor again whether or not a connection has failed.

  The number of times (accumulated number of times) that the LOCKN signal is input every time this process is executed within the predetermined period MT-SPN after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information. ) Is connected to the connection failure determination process in the case where it is determined whether or not the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT has been reached. The connection recovery process shown in FIG. 158 is executed. Note that the monitoring flag M-FLG, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT, and the communication check counter CC-CNT are set and reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. On the other hand, it is not reset by an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and is restored to the values of the monitoring flag M-FLG, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT, and the communication check counter CC-CNT just before the moment or power failure at the time of power recovery. It has become so.

  As described above, even if the LOCKN signal is determined to be input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, the LOCKN signal is determined based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST even during the predetermined period MT-SPN. If it is determined that there is no input, the value 0 is set in the monitoring flag M-FLG in step S1536, and the value 0 is set in the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1538. Each time it is done, it is possible to monitor again whether or not the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has failed. When the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1525 is not within the predetermined period MT-SPN, that is, the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is the predetermined period MT-SPN. Exceeds 0 (timeout), the value 0 is set in the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1538. Actually, however, the LOCKN signal detection history in step S1522 before the time out in step S1525. If it is once determined that the LOCKN signal is not input based on the information LOCKN-HIST, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set in step S1538, or the communication check counter CC-CNT is accumulated in step S1526. Less than upper limit CC-LMT If there is no (large), that is, if the cumulative number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the monitoring timer counter in step S1534 A value 0 is set in MT-CNT.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 157, the presence / absence of the LOCKN signal is determined based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Even if it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal is continuously input every time the connection failure determination process is performed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on LOCKN-HIST. Good. FIG. 165 (a) shows the state of the LOCKN signal continuously every time the connection failure determination process is executed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. FIG. 165 (b) is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing in the case where it is determined whether or not there is an input. FIG. 165 (b) shows that LOCKN signal is input based on LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a connection recovery process when it is determined whether or not there is a continuous input of a LOCKN signal every time the connection failure determination process is executed for a predetermined period LMT.

  Each time this process is executed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that there is an input of the LOCKN signal based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. The connection failure determination processing in the case of determining whether or not there is an input is a flowchart similar to the connection failure determination processing for determining whether or not a LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. The steps for performing the same processing are given step numbers in the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. Here, different points will be described in detail. Based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal is continuously input every time this process is executed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input. When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 illustrated in FIG. 100 performs the peripheral control illustrated in FIG. 101 in step S1520 as illustrated in FIG. 165 (a). The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 4150cak of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the MPU 4150a. Whether it matches the value Determines whether or not. When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is incremented by 1 (incremented, step S1524 '). This monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is a counter that is counted up every time this routine (this process) is executed since it is determined that there is an input of the LOCKN signal. 147, which is executed as a warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 147, and this peripheral control steady process is repeatedly executed every 16 ms. A value obtained by multiplying the value of −CNT by 16 ms is an elapsed time from when it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input.

  Subsequent to step S1524 ', it is determined whether the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is within the predetermined period LMT (step S1527). In this determination, the LOCKN signal is continuously input every time this process is executed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is determined whether the time during which the LOCKN signal is input has reached the predetermined period LMT.

  When the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1527 is within the predetermined period LMT, that is, after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, During the period LMT, every time this process is executed, the LOCKN signal is continuously input. When the time during which the LOCKN signal is input does not reach the predetermined period LMT, the communication abnormality flag FLG is set in step S1528. While the value 0 is set and this routine is finished, the time converted based on the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT in step S1527 is not within the predetermined period LMT, that is, based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. After it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input Each time this process is executed for the fixed period LMT, the LOCKN signal is continuously input, and when the time during which the LOCKN signal is input reaches the predetermined period LMT, the communication abnormality flag FLG in step S1530. Is set to 1 and the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set to 0 (step S1534), and this routine is terminated.

  Here, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 165 (a) is performed only for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that there is a LOCKN signal input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Each time it is executed, the value is set to 1 when the LOCKN signal is continuously input, and is set to 0 when the LOCKN signal is not continuously input. Note that the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is reset when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and is reset with a value of 0. It is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure occurs during power transmission.

  In step S1534, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set to a value of 0, so that this process is executed only for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Each time it is done, it can be repeatedly determined whether or not there is a continuous input of the LOCKN signal. As a result, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed each time this process is executed, even when the state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has failed is continued for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to monitor again whether or not a failure has occurred.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 does not match the connection confirmation determination value, a value 0 is set in the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT (step S1538). Exit. When the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is set to 0 in step S1538, each time this process is executed, it is monitored again whether or not there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Can be done. Note that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT is reset with a value of 0, but is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure. The value is restored to the value of the monitoring timer counter MT-CNT just before the moment or power failure occurs during power transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (b), every time the connection failure determination process is executed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, The connection recovery process executed following the connection failure determination process when determining whether or not there is a signal input is the presence or absence of the input of the LOCKN signal based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST shown in FIG. 158 is a flowchart similar to the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 158 that is executed following the connection failure determination process, and the steps for performing the same process are given step numbers in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. . Here, different points will be described in detail. Whether the LOCKN signal is continuously input every time the connection failure determination process is performed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST When the connection recovery process is started following the connection failure determination process in the case of determining, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 100 displays the screen in step S1540 as shown in FIG. 165 (b). When the production is progressing along the generation schedule data, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the routine is finished as it is, while the production is completed along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540. When all pointer updates are completed, that is, the screen generation scan When Joule data has not been activated, the communication failure flag CC-FLG at step S1544 it is determined whether the value 0.

  Here, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is, as described above, between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, the transmitter. FIG. 165 (a) shows only a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that there is a LOCKN signal input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Each time the connection failure determination process is executed, the value is set to 1 when the LOCKN signal is continuously input, and is set to 0 when the LOCKN signal is not continuously input.

  When the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, between the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 (that is, the transmitter). FIG. 165 (a) shows a state in which a failure occurs in the connection between the receiver and the receiver) for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that the LOCKN signal is input based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. When the LOCKN signal is not continuously input every time the connection failure determination process shown is executed, the SYNC pattern output process described above is performed in step S1546, and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, the communication abnormality flag CC is displayed in step S1544. -FLG is not 0 (with value 1 A fault occurs in the connection between the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided in the liquid crystal output board 3420 and the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425 (that is, connection between the transmitter and the receiver). Every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 165 (a) is executed for a predetermined period LMT after it is determined that there is an input of the LOCKN signal based on the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. When the LOCKN signal is continuously input, the communication error display process described above is performed in step S1548, and this routine is terminated.

  In the above-described embodiment, the relationship between the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the brightness of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is from 0Ω (zero Ω) where the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is the minimum resistance value. As the maximum resistance value is changed to 100Ω, the change amount of the combined resistance value with respect to the change amount of the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is reduced, whereby the change amount of the current flowing in the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reduced. The characteristic that the amount of change in the luminance of the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 changes with a small curve with respect to the amount of change in the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 (shown by the solid curve in FIG. 118 (a)). Characteristic curve), the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 and the sub liquid crystal display device The relationship between the brightness of the backlight 450 and the brightness of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is changed as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is changed from 100Ω which is the maximum resistance value to 0Ω (zero Ω) which is the minimum resistance value. The change amount of the combined resistance value with respect to the change amount of the value is reduced, so that the change amount of the current flowing through the backlight of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is reduced to reduce the change amount of the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0. The LED current adjustment circuit 3425f and the luminance adjustment circuit 3425g may each be configured to have a characteristic (characteristic curve) in which the amount of change in luminance of the backlight changes in a curved line. Even in this configuration, as the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is changed from 100Ω which is the maximum resistance value toward 0Ω (zero Ω) which is the minimum resistance value, the subtraction for the variable operation of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is performed. As the inclination of the characteristic curve of the luminance of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 3450 is reduced, the resistance value of the luminance adjustment volume SDVR0 can be quickly brought close to the target resistance value of about 38Ω, as in the present invention. As the target resistance value approaches 38Ω, the slope of the characteristic curve decreases as the target resistance value approaches, and the operation amount for variably operating the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is set as the target value and the resistance value of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 as the target value. By increasing the resistance value, the resistance of the brightness adjustment volume SDVR0 is increased. The resistance value can be gradually brought close to the target resistance value of about 38Ω, and adjustment is easy. Therefore, it is possible to easily finely adjust the luminance of the backlight.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5, but the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300 and the right side of the dish unit 300. The sub liquid crystal display device 3450 shown in FIG. 95 may be attached as the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the door frame of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 20 and the like when viewed from the left front. The operation unit 400 is attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300 and Door frame 5 ′ to which the dish side liquid crystal display device 470 is attached.
It is the perspective view which looked at from the left front. The dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 ′ will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 166, an operation unit mounting part 314 c to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed at the upper center of the dish unit 300. A liquid crystal attachment portion 314d for attaching the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of 314c. The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 on which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and for example, when a player presses the portion downward with a hand, the upper plate 314d bends downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the hand on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged by bending the upper plate upper panel 314. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. As described above, the difference between the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 ′ is that the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5, whereas the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 ′. The operation unit 400 is attached to the upper center of the plate unit, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is attached to the right side of the plate unit 300. A small difference other than the above is formed so that the shapes of the cover main body 426 and the front cover 428 of the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 do not interfere with the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470. In connection with this, the shape of the operation unit mounting portion 314c formed at the upper center of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 is also formed so as not to interfere with the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470, and the door frame 5, the upper plate front decorative member 316, the upper plate upper lens 318, the upper plate upper inner lens 319, and the like are formed so as not to interfere with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. There is almost no difference other than the above.

  In this case, since the sub liquid crystal drive substrate box 3430 in which the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is accommodated is provided from the game board 4 to the door frame 5 ′, FIG. 100 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the route to the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422, and the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 is the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the sub liquid crystal. The path is the drive substrate 3425, and the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH2 to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 becomes extremely long. For this reason, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. As described above, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 is used for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data becomes long as described above. By adopting a differential communication called “by-One (registered trademark)”, the system is hardly affected by noise. The sub liquid crystal relay substrate 3422 is provided on the game board 4 side.

  By replacing the game board 4 with a new game specification, the game board itself is replaced every predetermined period (for example, 3 months or 6 months), but the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is placed on the right side of the dish unit 300. By mounting as the side liquid crystal display device 470, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is not replaced until it is shipped from the factory and disposed of. Therefore, the liquid crystal output substrate 3420, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 are not replaced. , The peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the path of the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, the path from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a provided on the liquid crystal output board 3420 to the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the sub liquid crystal drive board 3425, that is, transmitter and receiver As described above, even if a problem occurs in the connection between The sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the summiter IC 3420a and outputs the image to the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 cannot receive the image transmitted from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a normally and the sub liquid crystal receiver ICSDIC0. The LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that informs that a communication failure has occurred during image communication with the transmitter IC 3420a, can be output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 that is an effect control microprocessor. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a to which the LOCKN signal is input sends a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a to the sub liquid crystal receiver IC SDIC0. By outputting a connection confirmation signal informing of starting signal to the sub-LCD transmitters IC3420a, thereby making it possible to eliminate the communication trouble between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can detect a malfunction of the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 due to a communication malfunction between image communications at an early stage and can work on the sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a so as to eliminate the malfunction. Yes. Thereby, the sub-liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420a included in the liquid crystal output substrate 3420 is transferred from the sub liquid crystal display device 470 to the sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425 for the upper-side liquid crystal display device 470 that is not replaced until it is shipped from the factory and disposed of. Even if a failure occurs in the route extending to the receiver ICSDIC0 for the sub liquid crystal, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure can be automatically solved, so the door frame 5 ' Can be used for a long time, and even if the door frame 5 ′ comes out as a used product, the door frame 5 ′ can be used for a long time, and the life of the door frame 5 ′ can be extended. . In addition, when the sub liquid crystal display device 3450 is attached to the right side of the plate unit 300 as the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the processes and effects in FIGS. 147 to 159 and 162 to 165 described in detail are performed. However, it goes without saying that it can be implemented.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine, such as a slot machine or The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that uses a game ball to play a slot game).

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Main body frame, 4 ... Game board, 5 ... Door frame, 130 ... Side speaker, 222 ... Upper right speaker, 262 ... Upper left speaker, 821 ... Lower Speaker, 400 ... operation unit, 401 ... dial operation part, 405 ... press operation part, 1100 ... game area, 1900 ... liquid crystal display device, 2101 ... upper start port, 2102 ... lower start port, 3420 ... liquid crystal output board, 3420a ... Sub liquid crystal transmitter IC 3420c Forced switching circuit 3420d Differential circuit 3425 Sub liquid crystal drive substrate 3425b Backlight power supply circuit 3425f LED current adjustment circuit 3425g Brightness adjustment circuit 3430 Sub liquid crystal Drive board box, 3430a ... adjustment hole, 3450 ... sub liquid crystal display device, 4100 ... main control board (game system) Means) 4100a ... main control MPU (game control microprocessor), 4110 ... payout control board, 4110b ... blackout monitoring circuit, 4140 ... peripheral control board (production control means), 4140a ... volume control volume, 4150 ... peripheral control section, 4150a: Peripheral control MPU (production control microprocessor), 4150c ... Peripheral control RAM, 4160 ... Liquid crystal and sound control unit, 4160a ... Sound source built-in VDP, 4170 ... Lamp drive board, 4180 ... Motor drive board, 5000 ... Decoration board (light emission) Control means), 5000a ... filter circuit, 5000b ... buffer circuit with Schmitt, DLCN0 ... input connector (input / output interface unit), DLCN1 ... output connector, DLCN2 ... output connector (input / output interface unit), DLIC0 ... LED drive IC, C ... noise removing circuit (noise removing means), SDIC0 ... sub LCD receiver IC, SDR5 ... resistance, SDR6 ... resistance, SDVR0 ... brightness adjusting volume.

Claims (1)

A game control means equipped with a game control microprocessor for proceeding with the game based on the fact that the game ball launched by the launch device has entered the start area toward the game area defined on the game board;
An effect control means equipped with an effect control microprocessor that transmits a control signal to a plurality of light emission control means for causing the light emission means to emit light based on a control command transmitted from the game control means, and controls the progress of the effect,
A gaming machine comprising
The plurality of light emission control means are electrically connected by wires from the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means and connected to the self based on the identification information included in the control signal. Judge whether it is data or not, and at least
Noise removing means for removing noise from the control signal;
An input / output interface unit;
And the input / output of the control signal is shared by the input / output interface unit from the first light emission control means to the last light emission control means. In the case where it becomes difficult to use due to a problem with the light emission control means, the light emission control means from the first stage to the light emission control means at the final stage, except for the one light emission control means. A gaming machine characterized in that the order of the light emission control means can be arbitrarily rearranged so as to be linked together.